Garmin | G1000: Mooney M20M | Garmin G1000: Mooney M20M Garmin G1000 Pilot's Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN

Garmin G1000: Mooney M20M Garmin G1000 Pilot's Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
G1000 Integrated Avionic System
®
l0
20
7
5
D.C.
ELEC.
29.9
4
3
10
5
0
VERTICAL SPEED
100 FEET PER MINUTE
15
UP
5
10
NO PITCH
INFORMATION
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411 f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House,
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire
SO40 9LR U.K.
p:44 (0) 23 8052 4000
f:44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
www.garmin.com
240
190-00647-03
Revision A
10
11900
225
11800
210
11700
10
10
200
1
500
1
11600
2
360‘
190
N
33
29.86IN
3
GPS
ENR
W
E
12
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200 f:913.397.8282
15
10
2
6
R
12000
250
TAS 269KT
Mooney M20M/
M20R/M20TN
20
DOWN
TURN COORDINATOR
2 MIN.
In Hg
29.8
6
L
2
ALT
30
8
24
l0
260
Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
S
21
20
20
l0
®
l0
20
1
18000
15
9
FEET
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
100
PILOT’S GUIDE
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2006, 2008, 2014 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0401.32 or later. Some differences in operation may be observed when
comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9LR, U.K
Tel: 44 (0) 23 8052 4000
Fax: 44 (0) 23 8052 4004 Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® and G1000® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. FliteCharts® and SafeTaxi® are trademarks of Garmin
Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen,
Inc.; Stormscope® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications; Avidyne® and TCAD® are registered trademarks of Avidyne Corporation.
SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
September 2014
Printed in the U.S.A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G1000 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and
could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74 Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the G1000 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the G1000 system must be updated
regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is
intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
i
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: For safety reasons, G1000 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING: The Garmin system, as installed in this aircraft, has a very high degree of functional integrity.
However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable
system failures is not practical.
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G1000 utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G1000 can be
misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the G1000
Pilot’s Guide documentation and the G1000 Integrated Avionics System in the Airplane Flight Manual.
Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications
from the G1000 to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual
sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: Do not use the system to attempt to penetrate a thunderstorm. The illustrations in this guide are
only examples. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding any thunderstorm identified as severe of giving intense radar echo by
at least 20 miles.
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the system within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia);
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand)
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
ii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The Garmin G1000 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by
an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty
and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby
thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of
two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points
reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G1000 panel and
displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G1000 system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs) by virtue
of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Type 2 LOA Status.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed
in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support to
coordinate the revised DQRs.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Report An Aviation Data Error Report.’
iv
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-00647-00
190-00647-01
190-00647-02
190-00647-03
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Revision
A
A
B
A
A
Date
7-19-06
3-3-08
3-4-08
11-20-08
9-5-14
Page Range
All
All
All
All
All
Description
Initial release
Update to GDU 8.20, added WAAS
Revise System Software version number
Update to GDU 9.03, added SVS
Update to GDU 14.02
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description.................................................. 1
Line Replaceable Units............................................ 2
Secure Digital (SD) Cards........................................ 7
System Power-Up..................................................... 8
System Operation..................................................... 9
Normal Display Operation.............................................. 9
Reversionary Display Operation...................................... 9
G1000 System Annunciations....................................... 10
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 11
G1000 Controls....................................................... 13
PFD/MFD Controls....................................................... 13
Softkey Function.......................................................... 15
Accessing G1000 Functionality............................ 22
Menus........................................................................ 22
Data Entry.................................................................. 22
Page Groups............................................................... 23
System Setup and Status.............................................. 27
Display Backlighting.............................................. 40
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 44
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 44
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 46
Altimeter.................................................................... 47
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 49
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 49
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 50
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 55
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 62
Temperature Displays................................................... 62
Wind Data.................................................................. 63
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 64
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 65
System Alerting........................................................... 65
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 66
Traffic Annunciation..................................................... 66
Terrain Annunciations.................................................. 67
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 67
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 68
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 68
vi
2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 70
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 70
Heading Failure Modes................................................ 71
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 71
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
EIS Display............................................................... 74
Engine Page............................................................ 76
Fuel Calculations......................................................... 79
Leaning Assist Mode.............................................. 80
EIS Display in Reversionary Mode........................ 81
Lean Display............................................................... 83
System Display............................................................ 86
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................. 89
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display...................... 90
Audio Panel Controls................................................... 92
COM Operation....................................................... 94
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation...................... 94
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................... 95
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz..................... 96
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................... 97
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 101
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 102
Volume..................................................................... 102
NAV Operation...................................................... 103
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 103
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 104
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 106
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 111
ADF/DME Tuning....................................................... 112
GTX 33 Mode S Transponder............................... 116
Transponder Controls................................................. 116
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 117
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 120
IDENT Function......................................................... 121
ADS-B TX.................................................................. 121
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 122
Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 123
Power-up.................................................................. 123
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 123
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Speaker.................................................................... 123
Intercom................................................................... 124
Passenger Address (PA) System................................... 126
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 126
Split COM................................................................. 127
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 128
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 129
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 130
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 130
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 130
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 130
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 130
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction.......................................................... 131
Navigation Status Box................................................ 132
Using Map Displays.............................................. 134
Map Orientation........................................................ 134
Map Range............................................................... 136
Map Panning............................................................. 138
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 142
Topography............................................................... 143
Map Symbols............................................................ 146
Airways.................................................................... 152
Track Vector.............................................................. 154
Wind Vector.............................................................. 155
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 156
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 157
Field of View (SVT)..................................................... 158
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 159
Waypoints.............................................................. 160
Airports.................................................................... 161
Intersections............................................................. 168
NDBs........................................................................ 170
VORs........................................................................ 172
User Waypoints......................................................... 174
Airspaces............................................................... 180
Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 184
Flight Planning...................................................... 189
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 190
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 195
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 197
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 199
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 206
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 208
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 211
Parallel Track............................................................. 213
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 216
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 217
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 218
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 220
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 220
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 225
Altitude Constraints................................................... 227
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 231
Departures................................................................ 232
Arrivals .................................................................... 235
Approaches .............................................................. 238
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 246
Trip Planning............................................................. 246
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 250
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 253
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 281
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather................................................. 284
Activating Services..................................................... 284
Accessing SiriusXM Weather Products......................... 285
SiriusXM Weather Abnormal Operations...................... 318
WX-500 Stormscope............................................ 320
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 320
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 324
Terrain Proximity.................................................. 326
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data................................ 326
Profile View Terrain.............................................. 331
Profile View Display................................................... 332
Terrain-SVS............................................................ 335
Displaying Terrain-SVS Data........................................ 336
Terrain-SVS Page....................................................... 338
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 340
System Status............................................................ 343
TAWS-B.................................................................. 344
Displaying TAWS-B Data............................................. 345
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 348
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 350
System Status............................................................ 356
6.7 Traffic Information Service (TIS)......................... 358
Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 359
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 361
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 362
System Status............................................................ 363
6.8 SKY497 Traffic....................................................... 366
TAS Symbology.......................................................... 366
Operation................................................................. 367
Altitude Display......................................................... 369
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 370
TAS Alerts................................................................. 371
System Status............................................................ 372
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS Controls....................................................... 374
7.2 Flight Director Operation.................................... 376
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 376
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 377
Command Bars.......................................................... 378
Flight Director Modes................................................. 378
7.3 Vertical Modes...................................................... 379
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)................................................ 380
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)........................ 381
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)........................................... 382
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)........................................... 383
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC).................................. 384
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV)...................... 386
Glidepath Mode (GP) (WAAS only).............................. 391
Glideslope Mode (GS)................................................ 392
Go Around Mode (GA)............................................... 393
7.4 Lateral Modes....................................................... 394
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)................................................ 395
Heading Select Mode (HDG)....................................... 396
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)....................... 397
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC).............................. 399
7.5 Autopilot Operation............................................. 401
Engaging the Autopilot.............................................. 401
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 402
Disengaging the Autopilot.......................................... 402
viii
7.6 Example Flight Plan............................................. 403
Departure................................................................. 404
Intercepting a VOR Radial........................................... 406
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course.................................. 407
Descent.................................................................... 408
Approach.................................................................. 412
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 414
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts.......................... 416
AFCS Status Alerts..................................................... 416
Overspeed Protection................................................. 417
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)...................... 420
SVT Operation........................................................... 421
SVT Features............................................................. 423
Field of View............................................................. 432
SafeTaxi................................................................. 434
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision........................... 437
ChartView.............................................................. 440
ChartView Softkeys.................................................... 441
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 442
Chart Options............................................................ 450
Day/Night View......................................................... 455
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 458
FliteCharts............................................................. 461
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 462
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 463
Chart Options............................................................ 470
Day/Night View......................................................... 474
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 476
Airport Directory.................................................. 479
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.480
SiriusXM Radio Entertainment (Optional)......... 482
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 482
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 484
Scheduler............................................................... 488
Abnormal Operation............................................ 490
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................. 490
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 490
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 491
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 495
G1000 System Annunciations..................................... 496
G1000 System Message Advisories.............................. 497
AFCS Alerts............................................................... 509
Terrain-SVT Alerts...................................................... 510
Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations..................... 510
TAWS Alerts.............................................................. 511
TAWS System Status Annunciations............................. 512
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 513
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages........................... 514
Database Management................................................. 515
Jeppesen Databases................................................... 516
Garmin Databases..................................................... 520
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................. 525
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 533
Map Symbols.................................................................. 537
INDEX
Index .................................................................................I-1
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Blank Page
x
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) Section for details on the Garmin AFCS.
The G1000 is an integrated flight deck system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot using flat-panel color displays. The system consists of
the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1042/1044 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GIA 63(W) Integrated Avionics Units (IAU)
• GDL 69A Data Link Receiver
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GSM 85 Servo Gearbox
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GMA 1347 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
EIS
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are shown in Figure 1-2.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN is equipped with a Garmin Automated Flight Control System (AFCS),
providing flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), and manual electric trim (MET) functions of the G1000 System.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1040 – A GDU 1040 is configured as the Primary Flight Display (PFD). The display is a 10.4-inch LCD
screen with 1024 x 768 resolution. The displays communicate with each other through a High-speed Data Bus
(HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to an IAU.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1042/1044 – A GDU 1040 or 1042/1044 (for airframes equipped with the Garmin AFCS) is configured
as a Multi Function Display (MFD). The display is a 10.4-inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution. The
displays communicate with each other through a High-speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each
display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to an IAU.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GMA 1347 – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio, intercom,
and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit also provides manual control of
display Reversionary Mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP button; see Section 1.5, System Operation) and communicates
with both IAUs using an RS-232 digital interface.
2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GIA 63(W) (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs with the on-side PFD. Each
GIA 63W contains a GPS WAAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system
integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the on-side PFD via HSDB connection. The GIA
63Ws are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GDC 74A – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air temperature
(OAT) sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the
G1000 System, and it communicates with the primary IAU, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital
interface.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GEA 71 – The Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This
unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GTX 33 – The solid-state Transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability and communicates with both IAUs
through an RS-232 digital interface.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GRS 77 – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading information
via ARINC 429 to both the PFD and the primary IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including
accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information,
with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed
in Section 1.5, System Operation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GMU 44 – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing to
determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with
it via an RS-485 digital interface.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GDL 69A – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information to MFD maps and the
PFD Inset Map, as well as digital audio entertainment. The Data Link Receiver communicates with the MFD
via an HSDB connection. A subscription to XM Satellite Radio Service is required to enable Data Link Receiver
capability.
• GSA 81 and GSM 85 – The GSA 81 servos are used for automatic control of pitch, pitch trim, and roll. These
units interface with each IAU.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The GSM 85 servo gearboxes are responsible for transferring the output torque of the servo actuators to the
mechanical flight-control surface linkages.
4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
High-Speed Data Bus (Ethernet)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GDU 1040 or
GDU 1042/1044 (MFD)
GMA 1347
Audio Panel
GDU 1040 (PFD)
Reversionary
Control
Reversionary
Control
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
No. 1 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System Inegration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
Flight Director (with AFCS option)
GPS Output
No. 2 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
GRS 77
AHRS
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
GPS Output
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GMU 44
Magnetometer
Heading
AFCS
GTX 33
Transponder
GEA 71
Engine/Airframe
Unit
Autopilot Calculations
(optional)
GSA 81
Pitch Trim Servo
Autopilot Calculations
(optional)
APPENDICES
Autopilot Calculations
(optional)
GSA 81
Roll Servo
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GSA 81
Pitch Servo
Figure 1-1 Basic G1000 System Block Diagram
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
High-Speed Data Bus (Ethernet)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No. 2 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
AFCS
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
L3
Stormscope
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WX-500
L3
SKYWATCH
TAS
Becker
3250
ADF
GDL 69A
Data Link
Real-time Weather and
Digital Audio Entertainment
(subscription-based service)
Honeywell
KN 63
DME
APPENDICES
Figure 1-2 G1000 System Block Diagram With Options
NOTE: For information on additional equipment shown in Figure 1-2, consult the applicable user’s guide and
INDEX
the appropriate sections of this pilot’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with
the operation of this additional equipment.
6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.3 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Ensure the G1000 System is powered off before inserting an SD card.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix B for instructions on updating the aviation database.
EIS
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the upper right side of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Installing an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SD Card Slots
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-3 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 SYSTEM POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: See the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for specific procedures concerning avionics power application
and emergency power supply operation.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
EIS
The G1000 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features
that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-4. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel and the display bezels.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing in a straight line and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up, the splash screen (Figure 1-5) displays the following information:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System version
• Copyright
• Land database name and version
• Terrain database name and version
• Airport Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Aviation database name, version, and effective dates
• ChartView or FliteCharts database information
• Safe Taxi database information
AFCS
Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the ENT Key (or right-most softkey) acknowledges this information, and the Navigation Map Page is
displayed upon pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to
determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 1-4 PFD Initialization
8
Figure 1-5 MFD Power-Up Splash Screen
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in
Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the on-side display. Normal and reversionary G1000 display operation, as
well as the various AHRS modes and G1000 System Annunciations are discussed here.
NORMAL DISPLAY OPERATION
EIS
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the GPS Navigation Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(EIS; see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-6 G1000 Normal Operation
REVERSIONARY DISPLAY OPERATION
AFCS
NOTE: The G1000 System alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to Appendix A
for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it
can be adjusted from the remaining display.
APPENDICES
In the event of a display failure, the G1000 System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
Reversionary Mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the
Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP button. Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the
failed PFD) are flagged as invalid.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP Button also
activates/deactivates Reversionary Mode.
Figure 1-7 G1000 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-8 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). For a detailed description of all
annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for additional
information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
Upon G1000 power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All instruments
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any instrument remains flagged, the G1000 should
be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
GIA 63(W)
AFCS
GIA 63(W)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GRS 77 or GMU 44
APPENDICES
GEA 71
or
GIA 63(W)
GDC 74A
GIA 63(W)
INDEX
GTX 33 or GIA 63(W)
GIA 63(W)
GDC 74A
Figure 1-8 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77 AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure 1-14)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
EIS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NO
YES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
Mag Data Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
GPS Data Available and Reliable?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The AHRS (GRS 77) corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic
Field Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field
and its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years. See the Appendices for
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when
an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.
AFCS
AHRS Normal
Mode
NO
YES
Air Data Available and Reliable?
AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Heading Invalid
AHRS no-GPS
Mode
AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AHRS no-Mag
Mode
APPENDICES
Attitude/Heading Invalid
Figure 1-9 AHRS Operation
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts. Any
failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red
‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD(s) as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information. If GPS-based track
information is available while magnetometer input has failed, the HSI displays the ground track instead of
heading using HSI Track Mode. In this mode, a magenta ‘TRK’ annunciation and track readout appear on the
HSI. In addition, a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X appear above the ‘TRK’ annunciation to indicate
the HSI is displaying track instead of heading.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If both the heading and track are unavailable, the HSI displays a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X over
the heading readout box. The system also removes directional numbers and letters from the HSI.
HSI Track Mode (Heading Unavailable, Track Available)
Heading and Track Unavailable
Figure 1-10 Heading Failure Displays on the HSI
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading information.
12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.6 G1000 CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the
time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and Audio
Panel. PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information about Audio Panel and NAV/COM controls. AFCS controls (on the bezel of the MFD) are
described in the AFCS section.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EIS
1
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11
14
12
15
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10
16
17
AFCS
18
Figure 1-11 PFD/MFD Controls
1
2
4
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Heading Knob
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
Turn to manually select a heading
Joystick
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the Horizontal Situation
Indicator (HSI) and synchronize the Selected Heading to the and current heading
Turn to change map range
INDEX
5
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio on/off
Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
APPENDICES
NAV Frequency
Transfer Key
3 NAV Knob
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a
percentage)
Press to activate Map Pointer and move in desired direction to pan map
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6
CRS/BARO Knob
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)
7
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active
waypoint/station
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for
kHz)
COM Knob
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between COM1 and COM2
EIS
8
COM Frequency
Transfer Key
(EMERG)
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz)
automatically into the active frequency field
9 COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM
Frequency Box)
10
Direct-to Key (
11
FPL Key
12
CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on/off
) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint
and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route)
Displays flight plan information
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
13
MENU Key
14
PROC Key
15
ENT Key
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making
setting changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Validates/confirms selection or data entry
16
FMS Knob
Press to turn the selection cursor on/off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor on, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large
knob moves cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor
System Knob)
location)
APPENDICES
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar
appears, indicating more items to view. With cursor on, turn large knob to scroll
through the list.
17
INDEX
Softkey Selection
Keys
18 ALT Knob
14
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a
page group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)
Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display
Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the
thousands, the small knob selects the hundreds)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner)
and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Large (Outer)
Knob
Small (Inner)
Knob
EIS
Figure 1-12 Dual Concentric Knob
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkey
On
Softkey
Names
(Displayed)
BezelMounted
Softkeys
(Press)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-13 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
PFD SOFTKEYS
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.
AFCS
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the
previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
PFD
OBS
CDI
(optional)
ADF/DME
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
INSET
ALERTS
APPENDICES
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
Figure 1-14 Top-level PFD Softkeys
INDEX
INSET
(optional) (optional) (optional) (optional)
(optional)
OFF
190-00647-03 Rev. A
DCLTR
WX LGND
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
METAR
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
BACK
ALERTS
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
INSET
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
OFF
DCLTR (3)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
WX LGND
TRAFFIC
Displays icon and age on the Inset Map for the selected weather products (optional)
Displays traffic information on Inset Map
TRAFFIC: No Traffic displayed on Inset Map
TRFC-1: Traffic displayed on Inset Map
TRFC-2: Traffic Only display shown
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines,
terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale on Inset
(optional)
Map PFD
OBS
ADF/DME
XPDR
IDENT TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
CDI
Displays terrain information on Inset Map
Displays Stormscope information on Inset Map (optional)
the CDI Softkey to cycle through
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage on Inset MapPress
(optional)
navigation sources:
Displays XM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (optional)
TOPO
INSET
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TERRAIN
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
METAR
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
INSET
(optional) (optional) (optional) (optional)
(optional)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
OFF
DCLTR
WX LGND
TOPO
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
METAR
BACK
ALERTS
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
DCLTR-3
APPENDICES
Figure 1-15 INSET Softkeys
XPDR
INDEX
(optional)
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
ADSB-TX
BACK
ALERTS
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
16
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
Garmin
G1000
Pilot’s4 Guide for
the Mooney
M20M/M20R/M20TN
BACK
ALERTS
190-00647-03
Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYN VIS
PATHWAY
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALT UNIT
METERS
IN
HPA
STD BARO
OBS
CDI
ADF/DME
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
Displays softkeys to select wind data parameters
Longitudinal and lateral components
Total direction and speed
Total direction with head and crosswind speed components
Information not displayed
Displays/removes the DME Information Window (optional)
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, GPS/ waypoint identifier and GPSderived distance information, and ADF/frequency.
Displays the softkeys for selecting the two HSI formats
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV2 or GPS waypoint identifier and
GPS-derived distance information, and ADF/frequency.
Displays softkeys for setting the altimeter and BARO settings to metric units
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are selected)
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg)
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation modes on the CDI
Displays/removes ADF/DME Radio Tuning Window (optional; may appear as blank, ADF,
DME, or ADF/DME depending on installation)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DFLTS
WIND
OPTN 1
OPTN 2
OPTN 3
OFF
DME
BRG1
EIS
Enables synthetic terrain depiction
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current aircraft
position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within approximately 9 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configurations
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active
flight plan
SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS
HSI FRMT
360 HSI
ARC HSI
BRG2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ADF/DME
ALERTS
(optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYN VIS
ALERTS
ALT UNIT
HSI FMT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Select the STD BARO or
BACK Softkey to return to
the top-level softkeys
360 HSI
IN
HPA
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METERS
BACK
ARC HSI
ALERTS
ALERTS
ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
ALERTS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 1-16 PFD Configuration Softkeys
18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
INSET
PFD
OBS
CDI
(optional)
ADF/DME
XPDR
IDENT
SYSTEM
NRST OVERVIEW
ALERTS
TMR/REF
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
XPDR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys:
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
sources:
STBY
Selects standby mode (Transponder does not reply tonavigation
any interrogations)
- GPS
ON
Selects Mode A (Transponder replies to interrogations) - NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2
(VOR/LOC) and altitude
ALT
Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode (Transponder replies
to identification
interrogations)
GND INSET
Manually selects Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C
replies, but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S
interrogations
VFR
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in U.S.A. only)
(optional) (optional)
(optional)
(optional)
CODE
Displays transponder code selection
softkeys(optional)
0-7
ALERTS
OFF
DCLTR WX LGND
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG METAR
BACK
0—7
Use numbers to enter code
BKSP
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
ADS-B
TX
Enables/disables
automatic transmission of ADS-B position
Press and
the speed.(optional)
OFF or BACK Softkey to
TRFC-1
DCLTR-1
return
to
the
top-level
softkeys.
IDENT
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying
the
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2 return on the ATC screen
transponder
TMR/REF DCLTR-3
Displays/removes Timer/References Window
NRST
Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window
ALERTS
Displays/removes Alerts Window
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
XPDR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(optional)
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
ADSB-TX
BACK
ALERTS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
AFCS
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
ALERTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the IDENT or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 1-17 XPDR Softkeys
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation Map Page (default MFD page)
softkeys are described here.
ENGINE
MAP
DCLTR
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
DCLTR-1
EIS
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-18 Navigation Map Page Softkeys
ENGINE
ENGINE
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displays second-level engine softkeys (see the EIS Section for more information)
LEAN
Displays the EIS Lean Display (softkeys for engine leaning assist are shown when selected)
DEC FUEL
Decreases calculated fuel remaining by 1 lb for each softkey press
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
ENGINE
LEAN
INC FUEL
Increases calculated
fuel remaining by 1 lb for each softkey press
RST FUEL
Resets calculated fuel remaining to maximum capacity and resets fuel used to zero
MAP
Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeysPress the ENGINE Softkey to
return
to the top-level softkeys.
TRAFFIC
Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map
Page
PROFILE
Displays/removes profile view on Navigation Map Page
MAP
TOPO
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Navigation Map
Page
TERRAIN
Displays/removes terrain
information on Navigation Map Page
(optional) (optional) (optional) (optional) (optional)
STRMSCP
TRAFFICAIRWAYS
PROFILE
TOPO
TERRAINairways
AIRWAYS
BACK
NEXRAD
XMthe
LTNG
METAR LEGEND
Displays
on the
map; cycles
through
following:
(Default label is
AIRWAYS: No airways are displayed
dependent on map
AIRWY ON: All airways are displayed
setup option selected)
Press the BACK Softkey to
AIRWY LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed
return to the top-level softkeys.
AIRWY HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed
STRMSCP
Displays/removes Stormscope information on Navigation Map (optional)
CHKLIST
NEXRAD
Displays/removes NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Navigation Map Page
(optional)
XM LTNG
Displays/removes XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
ENGINE
DONE
XM LTNG
Displays/removes XM lightning
information on Navigation Map (optional) EXIT EMERGCY
METAR
Displays/removes METAR information on Navigation Map (optional)
BACK
Returns
to top-level
softkeys
The DONE Softkey label
changes
to UNDO
CHKLIST
INDEX
when the checklist item is already checked.
20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MAP
ENGINE
MAP
MAP
SHW CHRT
CHKLIST
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR SHW CHRT CHKLIST
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR SHW CHRT CHKLIST
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR SHW CHRT CHKLIST
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan
DCLTR-2
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
DCLTR-1
When available, displays optional checklists
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DCLTR
(3)
ENGINE
DCLTR-3
DCLTR-2
EIS
ENGINE
DCLTR-3
ENGINE
LEAN
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
ENGINE
LEAN
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
ENGINE
Figure 1-19 ENGINE Softkeys
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
MAP
MAP
TOPO
TRAFFIC PROFILE
TOPO
(optional)
TOPO
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
METAR LEGEND
(optional) (optional)
BACK
TERRAIN AIRWAYS STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
METAR
BACK
(optional)
TRAFFIC PROFILE
(optional)
TERRAIN AIRWAYS STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
(optional) (optional) (optional)
(optional)
(optional)
TERRAIN AIRWAYS STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
(optional)
LEGEND
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC PROFILE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
DECtop-level
FUEL INC softkeys.
FUEL RST FUEL
return to the
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
LEAN
MAP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENGINE
ENGINE
(optional)
Press the BACK Softkey to
BACK
METAR LEGEND
return to the top-level softkeys.
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 1-20 MAP Softkeys
DONE
EXIT
CHKLIST
EMERGCY
ENGINE
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
The DONE Softkey label changes to UNDO
when the checklist item is already checked.
EXIT
EMERGCY
CHKLIST
CHKLIST
APPENDICES
The DONE Softkey label changes to UNDO
DONE
when the checklist item is already checked.
The DONE Softkey label changes to UNDO
when the checklist item is already checked.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ENGINE
ENGINE
AFCS
CHKLIST
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys. CHKLIST
CHKLIST
Figure 1-21 Checklist Softkeys
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.7 ACCESSING G1000 FUNCTIONALITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MENUS
NOTE: No other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu is displayed. Pressing the
MENU Key while any other PFD window is displayed does not display the PFD Setup Menu.
EIS
The G1000 has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when
there are no additional features or settings for the window/page selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
Options for FPL Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Options for
NRST Window
APPENDICES
Figure 1-22 Page Menu Examples
DATA ENTRY
INDEX
The FMS Knob can be used for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., Flight ID, waypoint identifiers,
barometric minimum descent altitude) into the G1000 In some instances, such as when entering an identifier,
the G1000 will try to predict the desired identifier based on the characters being entered. In this case, if the
desired identifier appears, use the ENT Key to confirm the entry without entering the rest of the identifier
manually. This can save the pilot from having to enter all the characters of the identifier.
22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Using the FMS Knob to enter data:
1) If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Begin entering data by turning the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.
Turning the knob to the right scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting in
the middle at K, and the digits zero through nine. Turning the knob to the left scrolls in the opposite direction.
4) Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
EIS
5) Repeat, using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor, until the
field is complete.
6) Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field reverts back to its previous information).
PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Page Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group
and active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen in light blue. In the bottom right corner of
the screen, the current page group, number of pages available in the group, and placement of the current page
within the group are indicated by icons. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedure/Weather Information,
XM, Procedure Loading), the title of the page changes while the page icon remains the same. Pages for optional
functions (e.g. Stormscope) will not be displayed if the function is not configured.
Active Page Title
AFCS
Pages in Current Group
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Page Groups
Selected Page
MFD
APPENDICES
Figure 1-23 Page Title and Page Group Icons
There are four main page groups, navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary
depending on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
INDEX
1) Turn the large FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the desired page is selected.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Map Page Group (MAP)
Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map
Stormscope
Weather Data Link
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Installed Terrain Function
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-24 Map Pages
• Waypoint Page Group (WPT)
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Airport Information
(INFO Softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
AFCS
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Weather Information
(WX Softkey)
Intersection Information
NDB Information
Airport/Procedures/
Weather Information
Pages
VOR Information
Figure 1-25 Waypoint Pages
INDEX
APPENDICES
User Waypoint Information
24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Auxiliary Page Group (AUX)
Trip Planning
Utility
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS Status
System Setup
XM Satellite screens
EIS
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
XM
Pages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-26 Auxiliary Pages
Maintenance data is continuously recorded by the Central Maintenance Computer (CMC). At the discretion
of the Aircraft Manufacturer, this data may be displayed on an OEM DIAGNOSTICS Page accessible from within
the AUX Page Group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Nearest Page Group (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
AFCS
Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces
APPENDICES
Figure 1-27 Nearest Pages
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) which are selected first
from within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the
page. In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is pressed, even if a
different page group is selected.
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knob, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by key. In some instances, softkeys may be
used to access the Procedure Loading pages.
The Flight Plan pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected
by turning the small FMS Knob.
EIS
• Flight Plan Page Group (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Plan Catalog
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Stored Flight Plan
(NEW Softkey)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-28 Flight Plan Pages
AFCS
The Procedure Loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading page is
opened. These pages can also be accessed from the Active and Stored Flight Plan pages using the LD softkeys.
Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure Loading pages (note the single page icon in the
lower right corner).
• Procedure Loading Page Group (PROC)
Departure Loading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrival Loading
APPENDICES
Approach Loading
INDEX
Figure 1-29 Procedure Loading Pages
Information on optional electronic checklist pages is offered later in this section. Checklist pages may be
accessed from any page on the MFD using the CHKLIST Softkey.
26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETUP AND STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group, there are two system pages: System Setup and System Status. The System
Setup Page allows management of various system parameters, while the System Status Page displays the status
of all G1000 System LRUs.
AUX - SYSTEM SETUP PAGE
The System Setup Page allows management of the following system parameters:
• Time display format (local or UTC )
• COM transceiver channel spacing
(see the Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Displayed nearest airports
(see the Flight Management Section)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Airspace alerts
(see the Flight Management Section)
• Arrival alert
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Barometric Transition Alert
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
EIS
• Displayed measurement units
• Flight Director Format
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
• MFD Data Bar (Navigation Status Box) fields
(see the Flight Management Section)
• GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) range
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
• Audio alert voice
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-30 System Setup Page
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Pilot Profiles
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected
pilot profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen. The G1000 can store up to 25 profiles; the
currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at
the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, or deleted.
AFCS
Figure 1-31 Display Unit Settings (System Setup Page)
Creating a profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
INDEX
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If an SD card is inserted into the top slot of the MFD, pilot profiles may imported from the SD card into the
system, or exported from the system to the SD card.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Because system settings may vary from one airframe to another, always verify system settings from an
imported profile are consistent with the desired settings.
Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the pilot profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
EIS
3) Select the IMPORT Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
4) The system displays the Pilot Profile Importing window with ‘IMPORT’ highlighted. To change the selected
profile to be imported from the SD card (shown as ‘SELECT FILE’), turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
profile file name, then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight a profile from the list, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) If desired, the profile name to be used after profile has been imported can be changed by turning the FMS
Knob to highlight the ‘PROFILE NAME’ field, then use the large and small FMS Knobs to enter the name, and
press the ENT Key. Imported profile names cannot begin with a blank space or be named ‘DEFAULT’, ‘GARMIN
DEFAULTS’ or ‘DEFAULT SETTINGS’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) With ‘IMPORT’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
7) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Pilot Profile Importing window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) If successful, the system displays ‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’ in the IMPORT RESULTS window below. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
The imported profile becomes the active profile.
Pilot Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Pilot Profiles Available for Import from
SD Card (‘STEVE’S PROFILE’ Selected)
Import Successful
Figure 1-32 Pilot Profile Import (AUX - System Setup Page)
30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Pilot Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) If necessary, activate the desired pilot profile to export. Only the currently active Pilot Profile can be exported.
4) Select the EXPORT Softkey. The system displays the Pilot Profile Exporting window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) To export the pilot profile using the current supplied name, press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’ highlighted. To
change the profile file name turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECT FILE’ field, then enter the new
name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’
highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If the profile name to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system displays
an ‘Overwrite existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the SD card
with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to
the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
7) If successful, the EXPORT RESULTS window displays ‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Export Successful
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot Profile Exporting Window, Enter a
Name to Use for Exported Profile
Figure 1-33 Pilot Profile Export on the AUX - System Setup Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Date/Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 obtains the current Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner of
the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set by adding/
subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-34 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
Figure 1-35 Date/Time Settings (System Setup Page)
32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Display Units
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the G1000 screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set from here.
N/A
N/A
All positions
N/A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Position
Engine Indication System (EIS)
AFCS
Weight
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel and Fuel Flow
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Gallons*
Imperial Gallons
Kilograms
Liters
Pounds
Pounds*
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’*
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Temperature
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude and Vertical
Speed
Exceptions
EIS
Distance and Speed
Settings
Affected Quantities
Magnetic (North)* Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Metric
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Nautical*
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Feet*
All altitudes on MFD
Meters
All elevations on MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Category
Navigation Angle
* Default setting
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
APPENDICES
Changing a display unit setting
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Display Units Box.
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Arrival Alerts
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows arrival alerts to be turned on/off and the alert
trigger distance set. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a userspecified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan).
Once the set distance (up to 99.9 units) has been reached, an “Arrival at [waypoint]” message is displayed
in the PFD Navigation Status Box.
Figure 1-36 Arrival Alert Settings (System Setup Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling an arrival alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the Arrival Alert Box.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Audio Alerts
The Audio Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows the audio alert voice to be set to male or female.
Changing the audio alert voice:
INDEX
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice.
5) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUX - SYSTEM STATUS PAGE
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a Mooney service center
or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-37 Example System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO or AIRFRAME
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
APPENDICES
Selecting the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Selecting the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the database window. Selecting the softkey a third time will change the softkey label to PFD2
DB. PFD 2 database information is now displayed in the database window.
The ANN TEST Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
UTILITY PAGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX Utility Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a
record of the time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum
groundspeeds—are displayed from the time of the last reset. Refer to the Additional Features section for a
dicussion on the Scheduler and Flight Data Logger features.
Figure 1-38 Utility Page
Timers
AFCS
The G1000 timers available include:
• Stopwatch-like generic timers (available from the PFD Timer/References Window and on the MFD AUX
- Utility Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Total-time-in-flight timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
• Time since departure (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
INDEX
APPENDICES
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the
countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before
reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when
reset, the digits are zeroed.
36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (hh/mm/ss).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and
press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
EIS
7) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
8) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-39 Generic Timer (PFD Timer/References Window)
AFCS
Setting the generic timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
APPENDICES
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
INDEX
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
37
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-40 Timers (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting the flight timer starting criterion
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The G1000 records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled
from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Resetting the departure time
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
Trip Statistics
EIS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.8 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel and Audio Panel keys can be adjusted automatically or
manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting adjustment) uses photocell technology to automatically adjust
for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance
through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Manual backlighting adjustment can be accomplished using
the existing instrument panel dimmer bus or the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting
can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
EIS
Adjusting display backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With the intensity value now highlighted, enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
6) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) With the intensity value now highlighted, enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
INDEX
APPENDICES
10) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
PFD
40
Figure 1-41 PFD Setup Menu
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup
instruments.
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS flight director modes.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The G1000 provides increased situational awareness by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with
an easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) featuring a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed,
and course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain,
traffic, and weather information also appears on the PFD and is explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– Turn Rate Indicator
– True airspeed
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Navigation source
– Vspeed reference bugs
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
– Bearing pointers and information windows
• Altimeter, showing
– DME Information Window
• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
– Barometric setting
• Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
– Reference altitude
• Timer/References Window, showing
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
– Generic timer
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA)
– Vspeed values
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
AFCS
– Trend vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Indicated airspeed
• Wind data
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
APPENDICES
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
20
19
18
1
17
16
15
2
EIS
14
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
13
3
12
4
11
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
10
7
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
1
NAV Frequency Box
11
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
12
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
13
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Current Heading
14
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Heading Bug
15
Altimeter
6
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
16
Selected Altitude
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
17
COM Frequency Box
8
Softkeys
18
Navigation Status Box
9
System Time
19
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
Transponder Data Box
20
Attitude Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
12
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
11
1
2
EIS
10
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8
3
7
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
7
Flight Plan Window
2
Selected Heading
8
Annunciation Window
3
Wind Data
9
Selected Course
4
Inset Map
10
Vertical Deviation Indicator
5
Bearing Information Windows
11
VNV Target Altitude
6
Barometric Minimum Descent
Altitude
12
AFCS Status Annunciation
AFCS
Traffic Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the approved aircraft documentation for airframe-specific airspeed criteria and Vspeed
values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed (TAS)
is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching maximum operating
speed (VMO), at which point appears red.
Operating Ranges
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Indicated
Airspeed
Low Speed Range
Red Pointer at VNE
Vspeed
References
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Speed
Ranges
AFCS
True
Airspeed
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripes are red and yellow. Normal operating range is green, caution range is yellow, and the never exceed speed
(VNE) begins with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe.
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line, extending up or down the airspeed scale to the right of
the speed range. The end of the trend vector indicates the predicted airspeed in six seconds if the current rate of
acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses VNE, the number in the indicated airspeed pointer changes
to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is
not available due to a system failure.
INDEX
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, and VY) can be changed and their bugs turned on/off from the Timer/References
Window. When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed to the right of the airspeed scale. All Vspeed values are
reset and all bugs turned off during power up.
44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed bugs on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field of the desired Vspeed to be changed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired value. When a speed has been changed from a default value, an asterisk
appears next to the speed.
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
EIS
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Timer/References Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Timer/References Window
Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menu
Turning all Vspeed bugs on/off:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) To activate all Vspeed bugs, press the ENT Key with All References On highlighted.
4) To remove all Vspeed bugs, turn the FMS Knob to highlight All References Off and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
EIS
2
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening five degree increments,
up to 25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch
marks occur every 2.5˚. When the optional Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system is enabled, the
pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Additional Features section for more information
about Garmin SVT™.
AFCS
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball
displacement on a traditional inclinometer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally
away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside the turn) is
indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
INDEX
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The current altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate overlay box above the Selected Altitude.
EIS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Bug
MDA/DH
Altitude
Bug
Current
Altitude
(Meters)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude
Trend
Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude (large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100-ft
increments. If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the
Selected Altitude.
Altimeter Setting (In HG)
AFCS
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Altimeter Setting (Metric)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-7 Altimeter Settings, English and Metric
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters as an overlay (Figure 2-7). Note the altitude tape does not change
scale when the metric overlays are enabled.
APPENDICES
Displaying the metric altitude overlays:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to enable/disable metric altitude overlays.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical navigation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
EIS
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys..
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey.
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
AFCS
The Baro Transition Alert flashes the barometric pressure setting. The Baro Transition Alert serves as
a reminder to the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting to standard when climbing through the
barometric transition altitude, or to change the barometric pressure setting from standard to the local altimeter
setting when descending through the barometric transition altitude.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Altitude in the Baro Transition Alert box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-8 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at 1000 and
2000 fpm and minor tick marks every 500 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate
is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the edge of the
tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
AFCS
VERTICAL DEVIATION
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available when an SBAS signal (such as WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS) is
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
available.
APPENDICES
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) is a magenta chevron to indicate the baro-VNV vertical deviation when
Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” alert.
Full-scale deflection (two dots) is 1000 feet. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes
invalid. See the Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2,
Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active
NAV field, and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107˚. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope
Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no
glideslope, “NO GS” appears instead of the green diamond.
INDEX
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approach service levels supporting SBAS vertical guidance
(LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V). When a GPS approach with one of these service levels is loaded into the flight
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
plan and GPS is the selected navigation source, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta diamond during
the approach. If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is heard. Full-scale
deflection (two dots), is angular with upper and lower limits. The upper limit is +/-492 feet (150 meters) and
lower limits depend on approach service level.
• LNAV/VNAV is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
• LPV is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
If the approach downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glipepath
Indicator
Glideslope
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Vertical Speed and Deviation
Indicator (VSI and VDI)
Glideslope Indicator
Glidepath Indicator
Figure 2-9 Vertical Speed and Vertical Deviation Indications
AFCS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks are at five degree intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and
the current track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The HSI also presents turn rate, course
deviation, bearing, and navigation source information. The HSI is available in two formats, a 360˚ compass
rose and a 140˚ arc.
APPENDICES
Changing the HSI display format:
1) Press the PFD Softkey
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
INDEX
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
15
14
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
12
2
11
3
10
5
9
6
9
EIS
4
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8
7
Turn Rate Indicator
9
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Flight Phase
3
To/From Indicator
11
Course Pointer
4
Navigation Source
12
Heading Bug
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
Turn Rate and Heading Trend Vector
6
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
14
Current Heading
7
Rotating Compass Card
15
Lubber Line
8
OBS Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-10 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
combined To/From Indicator and a sliding deviation indicator, and a deviation scale. Upon station passage, the
To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From flag. Depending
on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two different ways, an arrowhead (GPS, VOR,
OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Course Pointer Track Indicator
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Course
Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
INDEX
Flight Phase
Annunciation
APPENDICES
Navigation
Source
Figure 2-11 Arc HSI
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The selected heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. The cyan
heading bug on the compass rose corresponds to the selected heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if
the heading bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the selected heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the selected heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
EIS
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Heading
Heading Bug
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Heading
Selected
Course
Figure 2-12 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
INDEX
Figure 2-13 Heading and Course Indications (True)
52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (T)
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-14 System Setup Page, Navigation Angle Settings
TURN RATE INDICATOR
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and
right of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector
shows the current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds, based
on the present turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the
standard turn rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates
greater than four deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is
no longer valid.
Standard
Turn Rate
APPENDICES
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
Figure 2-15 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and ADF
sources by pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG or DME Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan and are
single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information windows to indicate
the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI
by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
Tuning Mode
EIS
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Distance to
Bearing Source
Station
Identifier
ADF
Frequency
Bearing Source Pointer 1
Pointer 2
Bearing 1 Information Window
Bearing Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-16 HSI with Bearing and Distance Information
AFCS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double
line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Frequency (ADF)
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
APPENDICES
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not
selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and in
a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DMEs.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window.
EIS
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc HSI
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
360º HSI
Flight
Phase
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation
Source
Arc HSI
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
CDI
CDI
Scale
Crosstrack
Error
CDI
AFCS
Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-17 Course Deviation Indicator
APPENDICES
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPSderived distance when navigating GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the
same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
55
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-18 Navigation Sources
Changing navigation sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
GPS
Selected
LOC1
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
VOR2
Selected
Selecting the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
APPENDICES
Figure 2-19 Selecting a Navigation Source
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
INDEX
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
56
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after the switch.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix prior to
the FAF (see Figure 2-20), it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically
switches from GPS to LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fix Prior to the FAF
Glideslope Intercept Point
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-20 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS CDI SCALING
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
AFCS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
57
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-21 System Setup Page, GPS CDI Setting
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-22, Table 2-1).
Missed
Approach
Figure 2-22 Automatic CDI Scaling
APPENDICES
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
INDEX
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA
58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm; except under the following conditions:
EIS
- When navigating with an active arrival route, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change until the
aircraft arrives at the first waypoint in the arrival route (if within 31 nm from the destination airport).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-23 and 2-24). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
2 nm
2 nm
FAF
FAF
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
angle based
on database
information
course width
350 ft
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
angle set
by system
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
Landing
Threshold
AFCS
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-23 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-24 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV, and LP+V
Approach CDI Scaling
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
APPENDICES
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
59
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LP)
Approach
(LP+V)
Approach
(LPV)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-23)
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LP
LP+V
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-24)
LPV
MAPR
0.3 nm
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
OBS MODE
AFCS
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
While OBS is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
60
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
EIS
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
Figure 2-25 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol in place of OBS and the OBS
Softkey label changes to SUSP. Pressing the SUSP Softkey resumes automatic sequencing of approach
waypoints.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SUSP
Annunciation
APPENDICES
Pressing the SUSP
Softkey Suspends
Waypoint Sequencing
Figure 2-26 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Pressing the DFLTS Softkey turns off metric Altimeter overlay, the Inset Map and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
EIS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F) as selected by the
pilot, in the lower left of the PFD under normal display conditions. Temperature is displayed below the true
airspeed in reversionary mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Normal Display
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Reversionary Mode
INDEX
Figure 2-27 Outside Air Temperature
62
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WIND DATA
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
EIS
Option 1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-28 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data below the selected heading.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Wind direction arrows with headwind or tailwind and crosswind components
AFCS
• OPTN 2: Wind direction arrow and speed
• OPTN 3: Wind direction arrow with headwind or tailwind and crosswind components
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in the table.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
GPS is the
Selected
Navigation
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phase of
Flight
AFCS
Figure 2-29 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD and not on a descent leg
X
X
X
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
X
Last altitude-constrained waypoint in active flight plan reached
X
X
(30 sec before)
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
64
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
SYSTEM ALERTING
EIS
Messages appear in the Alerts Window in the lower right corner of the PFD when a warning, caution, advisory
alert, or G1000 message advisory occurs. System alert messages are provided for awareness of G1000 system
problems or status and may or may not require pilot action. The Alerts Window allows system alerts to be
displayed simultaneously. The FMS Knob is used to scroll through the alert messages. The Alerts Window
is enabled/disabled by pressing the ALERTS Softkey. If the window is already open when a new message is
generated, pressing the ALERTS Softkey to acknowledge the message turns the softkey gray.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ALERTS Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued. The
annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert sounds until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. The
softkey then reverts to the ALERTS label, and when pressed again opens the Alerts Window to display a
descriptive message of the alert.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated
annunciation text for aircraft alerts. Warnings appear in red, cautions in yellow, advisory alerts in white,
and safe operating annunciations in green. New alerts are displayed at the top of the Annunciation Window,
regardless of priority. Once acknowledged, they are sequenced based on priority.
Alerts
Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Annunciation
Window
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkey
Annunciations
Figure 2-30 G1000 Alerting System
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
EIS
Outer Marker
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altimeter
Figure 2-31 Marker Beacon Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
Traffic is displayed symbolically on the PFD Inset Map, the MFD Navigation Map Page, and various other
MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix F for more details about the Traffic
Information Service (TIS) and optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected,
the following automatically occur:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled and displays traffic
• A flashing black-on-yellow TRAFFIC annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator for five
seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “TRAFFIC” aural alert is heard, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed. Refer
to the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment.
AFCS
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA Traffic
Symbol
APPENDICES
PFD Traffic Annunciation
PFD Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
INDEX
Figure 2-32 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
66
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN ANNUNCIATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) or Terrain-SVS annunciations appear on the PFD at
the top left of the Altimeter. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix A for information on terrain
alerts and annunciations.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-33 Traffic and TAWS Annunciations
ALTITUDE ALERTING
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever
the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is independent of the
Garmin AFCS, but alerting tones are heard only when the Garmin AFCS is installed. The following occur when
approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes
to black text on a cyan background and flashes for five seconds.
APPENDICES
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to cyan text
on a black background and flashes for five seconds.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background and
flashes for five seconds.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
INDEX
Figure 2-34 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. If the aircraft has the TAWS-B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
or Terrain-SVS features, this ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation is not applicable unless these features are inhibited,
have failed, or are unavailable.
EIS
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS approach using SBAS vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top left of the Selected Altitude,
flashes for several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Alt
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-35 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For altitude awareness, a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on barometric
altitude or temperature compensated barometric altitude, can be set. When active, the altitude setting is
displayed to the lower left of the altimeter and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the altimeter
(once the altitude is within the visible range of the tape). The following visual annunciations alert the pilot
when approaching the MDA or DH:
AFCS
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, a box labeled ‘BARO MIN’,
‘RA MIN’, or ‘COMP MIN’ (based on the selected altitude source) appears with the altitude in cyan text (or
magenta for TEMP COMP). The bug appears in cyan (or magenta for TEMP COMP) on the altitude tape at
the corresponding altitude once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA or DH, the bug and text become white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text appear yellow and the voice alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is generated. When the radar altimeter is selected as the altitude source for the Minimum
Descent Altitude alerting function, the color of the current radar height changes to yellow.
Within 2500 ft
Within 100 ft
Altitude Reached
APPENDICES
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
INDEX
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-36 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
68
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled. The function is reset when the power is cycled.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired altitude source: barometric (BARO), temperature compensated
barometric (TEMP COMP), or radar altimeter (RAD ALT). OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn
the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-37 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the Timer/References Window on the PFD,
or the Temperature Compensation Window on the MFD. There is only one compensation temperature
for the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and
the minimums. Refer to the Flight Management section for information about applying temperature
compensation to approach altitudes.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in the table can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur. Refer to
the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
EIS
LOI
INTEG OK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DR
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-38 Example HSI Annunciations
AFCS
In Dead Reckoning Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation source.
The following items on the PFD are then shown in yellow:
• Current Track Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Wind Data (calculated based on GPS information)
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
• GPS bearing pointers
INDEX
APPENDICES
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode.
70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HEADING FAILURE MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the system is unable to determine the aircraft heading, but GPS-based track information is available, the
HSI displays the ground track instead of heading using HSI Track Mode. In this mode, a magenta ‘TRK’
annunciation and track readout appear on the HSI. In addition, a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X
appear above the ‘TRK’ annunciation to indicate the HSI is displaying track instead of heading.
If both the heading and track are unavailable, the HSI displays a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X over
the heading readout box. The system also removes directional numbers and letters from the HSI.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HSI Track Mode (Heading Unavailable, Track Available)
Heading and Track Unavailable
Figure 2-39 Heading Failure Displays on the HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When heading information is unavailable, the system removes the bearing pointers from the HSI, and
removes wind data from the PFD and navigation maps.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose Low
AFCS
Nose High
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-40 Pitch Attitude Warnings
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• Traffic Annunciations
• System Time
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height Readout
• Flight Director Command Bars
• Inset Map
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
– Timer/References
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Wind Data
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Selected Heading Readout
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Course Readout
– System Messages
• Transponder Status Box
– Procedures
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
72
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
The G1000 Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, and other system parameters
on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure 3-1). EIS information can
be fully expanded to an entire page (EIS - Engine Page) using the ENGINE Softkey. In Reversionary Mode, the
displays are re-configured to present Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology together with the EIS.
EIS
EIS Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 3-1 MFD (M20M)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the
caution or warning ranges. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts flash to indicate
cautions and warnings. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed
across the instrument.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 EIS DISPLAY
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN IN)
2
Tachometer (RPM)
3
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7
8
AFCS
9
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
12
APPENDICES
13
Fuel Pressure Indicator
(FUEL PSI)
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
Oil Temperature Indicator
(OIL ºF)
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Indicator (TIT ºF)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate
engine power.
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range shown in red
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each tank (L and R)
Standard Tanks – Indicator displays up to 44.5 gallons when full
Long Range Tanks (options) – Allows 50 gallons per side (100 gallons total),
51 gallons per side (102 gallons total), or 65 gallons per side (130
gallons total), although the indicator range is the same as for standard
tanks. The pointers show tanks as full until the fuel quantity decreases
below 44.5 gallons.
Displays the fuel pressure in pounds per square inch (psi) (M20M only)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph) (M20R and M20TN only)
Displays engine oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
M20M only – High pressure caution range indicated in yellow
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (ºF)
Displays the temperature at the turbine inlet in degrees Fahrenheit (ºF)
(Turbocharged Aircraft M20M and M20TN)
Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays the exhaust gas temperature of the hottest cylinder in degrees
Fahrenheit (ºF) (Normally Aspirated Aircraft M20R)
Indicator (EGT ºF)
Cylinder Head Temperature Displays the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (number is shown
in pointer) in degrees Fahrenheit (ºF)
Indicator (CHT ºF)
Displays the bus voltage for the selected battery
Voltmeter
(VOLTS1 or VOLTS2)
Ammeter (BAT1 AMPS or Displays the battery amperage for the selected battery
BAT2 AMPS)
Elevator and rudder trim are displayed on slide bars; the white portions
Trim/Flaps Group (ELEV
of the bars represent takeoff trim ranges
TRIM, RUDDER TRIM,
FLAPS)
Flap position (UP, T/O, DN) is denoted; when the flaps are in transit
between positions, /// is displayed (Figure 3-2)
Flaps Up
Flaps Down
Flaps In Transit
INDEX
Takeoff Flaps
Figure 3-2 Flap Positions
74
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
9
8
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
EIS
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-4 EIS Strip Normal
(M20R - Normally Aspirated)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-3 EIS Strip Normal
(M20M - Turbocharged)
Figure 3-5 EIS Strip Normal
(M20TN - Turbocharged)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
75
DCLTR
MAP
ENGINE
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ENGINE Softkey accesses the EIS - Engine Page, which displays all engine, fuel, flap setting, trim
position, electrical, and fuel calculation information.
ENGINE
ENGINE
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
EIS
LEAN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 3-6 Engine Page Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit page
ENGINE
Accesses Leaning Assist Mode
LEAN
DEC FUEL Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
ENGINE
INC FUEL Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
RST FUEL Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft
1
SYSTEM Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to BACK
LEAN
indicateALERTS
engine
EngineENGINE
Manifold
Pressure
power
Gauge (MAN IN HG)
Press the BACK Softkey to
AFCS
2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3
Oil ENGINE
Temperature
SYSTEM
LEAN and
Pressure Gauges
(OIL °F PSI)
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure
range shown in red
return to the top-level softkeys.
(Ovation)
Displays
temperature
in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and pressure
inALERTS
pounds
CYLoil
SLCT
ASSIST
BACK
per square inch (psi)
Press the BACK Softkey to
to the(L
top-level
for return
each tank
and R)softkeys.
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal)
Fuel Quantity Gauges
LEAN
SYSTEM
FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
BACK
ENGINE
(L/R FUEL QTY GAL) StandardDEC
Tanks – Indicator displays up to 44.5 gallons when full
ALERTS
APPENDICES
Long Range Tanks (options) – Allows 50 gallons Press
per side
the (100
BACKgallons
Softkey total),
to
return
to
the
top-level
51 gallons per side (102 gallons total), or 65 gallons per side (130softkeys.
gallons
total), although the indicator range is the same as for standard tanks. The
pointers show tanks as full until the fuel quantity decreases below 44.5
gallons.
INDEX
4
5
76
Trim/Flaps Group
(ELEV TRIM, RUDDER
TRIM, FLAPS)
Engine Hours
(ENGINE HOURS)
Elevator and rudder trim are displayed on slide bars; the white portions of
the bars represent takeoff trim ranges
Flap position (UP, T/O, DN) is denoted; when the flaps are in transit between
positions, /// is displayed (Figure 3-2)
Displays the total time in hours (hrs) the engine has been in service
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Displays calculated endurance and range (in nautical miles, RANGE NM)
based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer
7
Electrical Group
(ELECTRICAL)
Displays the bus voltage and the battery amperage for the selected battery
8
Engine Temperature
Group (TEMPERATURE)
Displays exhaust gas (EGT) and head (CHT) temperatures of all cylinders in
degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Fuel Calculations Group
(FUEL CALC)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
Turbocharged Aircraft – Displays the temperature at the turbine inlet (TIT) in
degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph) and fuel pressure in pounds
per square inch (psi) (M20M only)
10
Fuel Flow Gauge
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph) (M20R and M20TN only)
11
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fuel Flow and Pressure
Gauge (FUEL GPH PSI)
EIS
9
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
AFCS
2
7
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
3
5
APPENDICES
4
Figure 3-7 Engine Page (M20M - Turbocharged)
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
11
10
8
EIS
1
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
6
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
4
Figure 3-8 Engine Page (M20R - Normally Aspirated)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
10
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
2
APPENDICES
7
6
3
5
INDEX
4
Figure 3-9 Engine Page (M20TN - Turbocharged)
78
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
Endurance (ENDURANCE), and range (in nautical miles, RANGE NM) are calculated based on the displayed
fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range is based upon groundspeed and
fuel remaining. See the Flight Management Section for information regarding the map feature related to the EIS
Fuel Calculations.
EIS
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
On the Engine Page, use the DEC FUEL and INC FUEL softkeys to obtain the desired fuel remaining (GAL REM).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
On the Engine Page, press the RST FUEL Softkey; this resets displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to maximum
fuel capacity for aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Fuel
Remaining
Calculated
Endurance
Calculated
Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-10 Fuel Calculations Group
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.3 LEANING ASSIST MODE
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the Aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Manual (AFM).
A leaning assist function is available on the Engine Page to assist in the leaning process.
Accessing Leaning Assist Mode:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey to open the Engine Page.
EIS
2) Press the LEAN Softkey to identify peaks.
3) Press the LEAN Softkey again to exit Leaning Assist Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the LEAN Softkey is pressed, the system initially highlights the number and EGT readout of the cylinder
with the hottest EGT. The ∆ Peak temperature is the difference between the peak temperature and the present
temperature for the peaked cylinder. When the first peak is detected, “1st” is annunciated below that cylinder’s
EGT bar and the temperature is marked in light blue on the graph.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system continues to detect peak EGTs for each cylinder lean of peak as the fuel flow is decreased, and the
peak of each cylinder’s EGT is indicated by a light blue marker on the graph. Once all cylinders are lean of peak,
the last cylinder to peak is denoted by the “Last” annunciation below its bar on the graph.
Light Blue Bar
Represents Peak
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Current Difference
from Peak Temperature
(Selected Cylinder)
INDEX
Indicates First
Cylinder to Peak
Indicates Last
Cylinder to Peak
Figure 3-11 Leaning Assist Mode (M20R - Normally Aspirated)
80
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.4 EIS DISPLAY IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
In reversionary display mode, the remaining display is re-configured to present PFD symbology together with
the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview for information about display Reversionary Mode).
EIS
When the G1000 displays enter reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into three displays: Engine (identical to
the normal EIS Display on the MFD), Lean, and System. For a description of the EIS Strip, refer to Section 3.1.
The Lean Display presents temperature information and assistance for engine leaning. The System Display shows
various system parameters and fuel calculations.
NOTE: If any parameters are exceeded while displaying the Lean or System pages, the system automatically
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
switches back to the EIS Engine Strip.
EIS Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-12 Reversionary Mode (M20R)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
81
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
The EIS Engine Strip is shown by default. To return to the EIS Engine Strip from the Lean or System Display,
press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
BACK
EIS
ENGINE
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
(Ovation)
ASSIST
ALERTS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
BACK
ALERTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 3-13 EIS Softkeys (Reversionary Mode)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• ENGINE
• LEAN
CYL SLCT
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
ASSIST
• SYSTEM
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
Displays second-level engine softkeys
Displays the EIS Lean Display
Cycles through the cylinders to obtain information about a particular cylinder, shown in
light blue on the bar graphs
Accesses Leaning Assist Mode (M20R only)
Displays the EIS System Display
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used to zero
82
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LEAN DISPLAY
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the Aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Manual (AFM).
NOTE: The Lean Assist function is not available for the turbocharged M20M or M20TN.
EIS
The EIS Lean Display provides information and a user interface to perform engine leaning. Exhaust gas
(EGT) and head (CHT) temperatures for each cylinder are displayed in bar graph form with a readout for the
temperature of the selected cylinder shown below each graph.
Accessing the EIS Lean Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the LEAN Softkey.
3) To return to the default EIS Engine Strip, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
By default, the cylinder with the hottest temperature is selected (number highlighted in light blue) when the
LEAN Softkey is pressed. Bars for cylinders with temperatures in the normal range are shown in white. On the
CHT Bar Graph, caution and warning conditions are indicated in yellow and red, respectively.
Since only one cylinder’s EGT and CHT are displayed at a time, this information can be cycled through for
each cylinder using the CYL SLCT Softkey; the selected cylinder’s number is highlighted in light blue on the
bar graphs. This softkey is disabled when Leaning Assist Mode is selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Monitoring the desired cylinder’s temperatures:
From the Lean Display, press the CYL SLCT Softkey to cycle through each cylinder and view its temperature
information. The selected cylinder number is highlighted in light blue.
AFCS
While in Reversionary Mode, the leaning assist function is available when the ASSIST Softkey is pressed
from the Lean Display to assist in the leaning process (refer to the section on Leaning Assist Mode for more
information).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN IN)
2
Tachometer (RPM)
3
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range shown in red
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each tank (L and R)
Standard Tanks – Indicator displays up to 44.5 gallons when full
Long Range Tanks (options) – Allows 50 gallons per side (100 gallons total),
51 gallons per side (102 gallons total), or 65 gallons per side (130
gallons total), although the indicator range is the same as for standard
tanks. The pointers show tanks as full until the fuel quantity decreases
below 44.5 gallons.
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
4
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH)
5
Turbine Inlet Temperature Displays the temperature at the turbine inlet in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
(TIT °F)
Turbocharged Aircraft (M20M and M20TN only)
Exhaust Gas Temperature The bar of the cylinder with the highest Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT)
is highlighted in light blue and its readout given below the bar graph in
Bar Graph (EGT °F)
degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
6
7
8
AFCS
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine
power
Trim/Flaps Group
(ELEV TRIM, FLAPS)
A hollow block appears to represent the peak EGT for the selected cylinder
when the ASSIST Softkey is pressed (M20R only)
Elevator trim is displayed on a slide bar; the white portion of the bar
represents the takeoff trim range
Flap position (UP, T/O, DN) is denoted; when the flaps are in transit
between positions, /// is displayed (Figure 3-2)
Cylinder Head Temperature The bar of the cylinder with the highest head temperature is highlighted
in light blue and its readout given below the bar graph in degrees
Bar Graph (CHT °F)
Fahrenheit (°F)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Caution and warning conditions for each cylinder are denoted by color
change of the cylinder’s bar to yellow or red, respectively
84
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
EIS
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
Figure 3-15 Lean Display
(M20R - Normally Aspirated)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-14 Lean Display
(M20M - Turbocharged)
AFCS
7
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
Figure 3-16 Lean Display
(M20TN - Turbocharged)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
The EIS System Display shows the dial gauges, various system parameters, and fuel calculations. Fuel
calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the fuel flow totalizer.
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
3) To return to the default EIS Engine Strip, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
From the System Display, press the DEC FUEL or INC FUEL Softkey to adjust the fuel remaining (GAL REM).
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
2
Tachometer (RPM)
3
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From the System Display, press the RST FUEL Softkey. This also resets the fuel remaining (GAL REM) to the
aircraft’s fuel capacity.
1 Engine Manifold Pressure
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate
engine power
Gauge (MAN IN)
4
INDEX
APPENDICES
5
Standard Tanks – Indicator displays up to 44.5 gallons when full
Long Range Tanks (options) – Allows 50 gallons per side (100 gallons total),
51 gallons per side (102 gallons total), or 65 gallons per side (130
gallons total), although the indicator range is the same as for standard
tanks. The pointers show tanks as full until the fuel quantity decreases
below 44.5 gallons.
Displays the fuel pressure in pounds per square inch (psi) (M20M only)
6
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine is displayed in pounds per
square inch (psi)
Oil Temperature (OIL °F) Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
7
Engine Hours (ENG HRS) Displays the total time in hours (hrs) the engine has been in service
8
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH) Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
9
Current fuel remaining in gallons as set by the pilot and adjusted for fuel
Calculated Fuel
burn since last set
Remaining (GAL REM)
Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays the Exhaust Gas Temperature of the hottest cylinder in degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) (M20R only)
(EGT °F)
10
86
Fuel Pressure Indicator
(FUEL PSI)
Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range shown in red
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each tank (L and R)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
12
14
Turbine Inlet Temperature Displays the temperature at the turbine inlet in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
(TIT °F)
(M20TN only)
Displays the bus voltage for the selected battery
Voltmeter
(VOLTS1 or VOLTS2)
Ammeter (BAT1 AMPS or Displays the battery amperage for the selected battery
BAT2 AMPS)
Trim/Flaps Group (ELEV Elevator and rudder trim are displayed on slide bars; the white portions
of the bars represent takeoff trim ranges
TRIM, RUDDER TRIM,
FLAPS)
Flap position (UP, T/O, DN) is denoted; when the flaps are in transit
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
11
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
4
5
6
AFCS
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
EIS
between positions, /// is displayed (Figure 3-2)
7
10
11
9
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Figure 3-18 System Display
(M20R - Normally Aspirated)
APPENDICES
12
Figure 3-17 System Display
(M20M - Turbocharged)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8
Figure 3-19 System Display
(M20TN - Turbocharged)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
87
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Blank Page
88
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in Mooney aircraft is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and reply status (Figure 4-1).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 MFD/PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and ADF/DME Tuning Window (PFD Shown)
90
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF frequencies, volume setting, and modes, and DME tuning
selection. Display by pressing the ADF/DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms an ADF frequency or ADF/DME mode and Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, enter ADF frequencies,
select ADF/DME modes, and Auto-tune entries when ADF/DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is
present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in
the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the transponder.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
22
23
17
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
92
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Not used in Mooney aircraft.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in Mooney aircraft.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – Not used in Mooney aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM 1/2 – Split COM Key. Allows simultaneous transmission on COM1 and COM2 by the pilot and copilot.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – Not used in Mooney aircraft.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: During PA Mode, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color
changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
EIS
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
Top Section of
the Audio Panel
AFCS
Tuning Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
94
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Entertainment audio, if selected, is muted during active COM radio reception. Refer to
Additional Audio Panel Functions later in this section, and details on the Data Link Receiver in the Additional
Features Section.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AFCS
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
APPENDICES
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
EIS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press for Two Seconds to
Load 121.500 MHz
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
96
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
EIS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Press the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-9, 4-10, and 4-11).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
98
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press Frequency
Transfer Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Active Frequency Field
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway
Information
Press INFO Softkey for
AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES
Windows
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press ENT Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Standby Field. Cursor
then Advances to
Next Frequency.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
100
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
AUX - SYSTEM
SETUP PAGE
INDEX
Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
EIS
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic Squelch
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOLUME
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM Volume
Level Remains for
Two Seconds
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level
102
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey twice selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the CDI
Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
Tuning Box
AFCS
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Pressing
the CDI Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speaker (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
AFCS
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning
104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other
EIS
Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Morse Code Identifier
for the GHM VOR is On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 with the small
NAV Knob and press the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication
AFCS
VOLUME
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
APPENDICES
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier.
3) Press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
106
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the VOR
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated while navigating by GPS, the system automatically
switches to LOC as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight
Management Section for details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EIS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 active
frequency field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is transferred to
standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
110
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
EIS
Outer Marker
Indication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys
AFCS
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-27). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
APPENDICES
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF/DME TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
The G1000 system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by
entering the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window. (The softkey may
be labeled ADF/DME, ADF, or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the selection cursor in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and
the ENT Key.
AFCS
Active ADF Frequency
Standby ADF Frequency
ADF
Mode
ADF
Volume
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DME
Tuning
Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-29 ADF/DME Tuning Window
112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF TUNING
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of the
ADF/DME Tuning Window. The G1000 System does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete ADF
Frequency Entry
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Character
Figure 4-30 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
0000.0.
AFCS
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT
Key to Transfer
the ADF
Frequencies
APPENDICES
Figure 4-31 Transferring ADF Frequencies
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
EIS
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Mode
Figure 4-32 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
AFCS
ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level
is set to 50%. The ADF volume level is the same for both Audio Panels.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting ADF receiver volume:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Volume
Figure 4-33 Adjusting ADF Receiver Volume
114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME TUNING
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
EIS
DME
Modes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-34 ADF/DME Tuning Window, DME Modes
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AFCS
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Extended squitter – If equipped with an extended squitter, the extended squitter is transmitted periodically
and contains information such as altitude (barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification.
The purpose of extended squitter is to provide aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based
Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, GND, VFR, CODE, IDENT, ADS-B TX, BACK.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the
transponder code. If an error is made, the code selection cursor can be moved back to the left one digit with
each press of the BKSP Softkey.
APPENDICES
Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD. Code entry must be completed with either the
softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
INDEX
After 45 seconds of transponder softkey inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
ADS-B TX
BACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ON
IDENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
STBY
XPDR
ALERTS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
EIS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-35 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
GROUND MODE
AFCS
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by pressing any
one of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field
of the Transponder Data Box. Ground Mode generates Mode S replies to discrete interrogations as well as
transmission of acquisition squitter and extended squitter, including ADS-B out (if equipped). Mode A, Mode
C, and Mode S all-call replies are inhibited..
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by pressing the GND Softkey.
APPENDICES
GND
Mode
Figure 4-36 Ground Mode
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box. In all other modes, these fields appear in green.
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inoperative.
EIS
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-37 Standby Mode
MANUAL ON MODE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies as well as transmission of acquisition and extended squitters, including ADS-B out (if equipped).
Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder code appear in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-38 ON Mode
118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey. Altitude Mode generates Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S replies
as well as transmissions of acquisition and extended squitters including ADS-B out (if equipped).
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
EIS
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-39 Altitude Mode
REPLY STATUS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-40 Reply Indication
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
EIS
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering
a Code
Figure 4-41 Entering a Code
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
AFCS
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VFR CODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
EIS
Figure 4-43 VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends an ID indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The ID return distinguishes
one transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s radar screen. The IDENT Softkey appears on
all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDNT indication is displayed in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
AFCS
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
Figure 4-44 IDENT Softkey and Indication
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADS-B TX
APPENDICES
If equipped with a GTX 33 with an extended squitter, the transmission of extended squitters containing
ADS-B out information is enabled/disabled by pressing the ADS-B TX Softkey. ADS-B transimssion defaults to
enabled at each power cycle. Do not disable ADS-B transmission unless requested by ATC.
Even with the ADS-B TX enabled, transmission of extended squitters containing ADS-B out information will
vary based on transponder mode.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
INDEX
Figure 4-45 ADS-B TX Enabled
ADS-B Transmission
Enabled
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering
Flight ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight
ID entry.
EIS
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
Flight ID
PFD Entry
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-46 Timer/References Window, Entering Flight ID
122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-47 Passenger Address and Speaker Keys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and up to two passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and
aircraft radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 4-48 Intercom Controls
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
OFF
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
Copilot, passengers,
music
Copilot, passengers,
music
OFF
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot; passengers, Copilot
music
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, passengers,
music
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers, music
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passenger Hears
AFCS
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios and communicate with each other.
APPENDICES
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot but can
communicate with each other.
INDEX
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios and is
able to communicate with everyone else.
124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
EIS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Volume Annunciation
AFCS
Squelch Annunciation
Figure 4-49 Volume/Squelch Control
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. When the PA
Key is selected on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished, and the active COM frequency
changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements. The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
PA Key is Selected on
the Audio Panel
Figure 4-50 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
AFCS
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
APPENDICES
MKR/MUTE
Key Stops Play
PLAY Key
Controls the
Play Function
INDEX
Figure 4-51 Marker Mute and Play Keys
126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SPLIT COM
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
EIS
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the
annunciator is extinguished.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
AFCS
Figure 4-52 Split COM Operation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: Music audio cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for the crew and passengers can be
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
The Audio Panel provides a stereo entertainment input from the data link receiver or a MUSIC IN jack for the
crew and passengers. The MUSIC IN jack is compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as
MP3 and CD players through a 3.5-mm stereo phone jack, installed in a convenient location. The headphone
outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC IN jack.
EIS
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4‑1).
CREW MUSIC
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Music can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT ICS Annunciators are
extinguished. Music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated and by the
copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Music Muting
Music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Music is always soft muted
when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to its original
volume level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and four
seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Music Muting Enable/Disable
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches music muting on and off. When
switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two beeps
indicate music muting is disabled. Music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
AFCS
PASSENGER MUSIC
Music coming through the passenger phone jacks can be heard only by the passengers and is never
muted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
APPENDICES
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
INDEX
Connecting a stereo input to the MUSIC IN jack removes the XM Radio Audio from that input.
128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the G1000 System, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well
as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
AFCS
Squelch
Annunciation
Volume
Annunciation
Figure 4-53 Audio Panel Controls
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify that the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs clockwise two full turns. This sets the headset intercom audio level to max volume
(least amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the G1000 includes equipment failures of the G1000 components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-54 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM TUNING FAILURE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
AFCS
Figure 4-55 COM Tuning Failure
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during Fail-safe operation.
REVERSIONARY MODE
INDEX
APPENDICES
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
Figure 4-56 Display Backup Button
130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The G1000 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the G1000.
EIS
The most prominent part of the G1000 are the two full color displays: a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the flight management data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach service level (LNAV,
LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Map Orientation
Navigation Page Title
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Range
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
APPENDICES
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
INDEX
PFD Navigation Status Box
132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol
Description
Symbol
Description
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Left Holding Pattern
EIS
Active Leg
Right Holding Pattern
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Track (TRK)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Bearing (BRG)
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Ground Speed (GS)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
AFCS
MFD Navigation Status Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns any field to its default setting.
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the G1000 to provide situational awareness in flight. Most G1000 maps
can display the following information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways,
land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers,
borders, etc.) with names
• Map range
•Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Nav range ring
• Fuel range ring
• Map Pointer information (distance and
bearing to pointer, location of pointer,
name, and other pertinent information)
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Topography scale
• Topography data
• Obstacle data
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• AUX - Trip Planning
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• Direct-to Window
• PFD Inset Map
• Procedure Loading Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP ORIENTATION
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
INDEX
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page:
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Setup
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
AFCS
Auto North Up
- On/Off
- Minimum Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO NORTH UP’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the G1000 to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Range Overzoom
APPENDICES
AUTO ZOOM
INDEX
Figure 5-6 Map Range
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact points. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
Auto zoom allows the G1000 to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window).
136
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the navigation maps return to the previous auto zoom range
based on the active waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determines the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
EIS
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
Auto Zoom:
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
AFCS
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
INDEX
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ (zero to 999 minutes).
EIS
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
MAP PANNING
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
AFCS
Map Pointer Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Pointer
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
138
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
EIS
Information about Point
of Interest
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer on
POI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
EIS
Information about
Airspace
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer on
Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
AFCS
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
140
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAVAID
Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GO BACK Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspace?’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspace
Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Measurement Line
Pointer Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Measurement
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
Topographic Data
on Profile Map
TOPO On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
TOPO Off
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
AFCS
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
143
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TOPO DATA
On/Off
TOPO DATA
Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values as shown following.
144
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
EIS
Ground Elevation at Map
Pointer Location (only
visible when Map Pointer is
displayed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
INDEX
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
EIS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg)
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
100
20
200
50
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
800
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Highways and Roads
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
N/A
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
146
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
2000
2000
250
500
150
300
50
100
See Additional Features
3
20
N/A
Off
100
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
15
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
See Airports, NAVAIDs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg)
EIS
Large Airports (LARGE APT) (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT) (8100 ft > Longest
Runway ≥ 5000 ft)
Small Airports (SMALL APT) (Longest Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a tower frequency)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYMBOL SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
EIS
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off.’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LAND DATA
On/Off
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
INDEX
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
148
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) Select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Text Label Size
(None, Small Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maximum Display Range
AFCS
Text Label Size
(None, Small Med, or Lrg)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP DECLUTTER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Declutter Level
EIS
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
Decluttering the map:
Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
150
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AFCS
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower
altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
EIS
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
APPENDICES
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
INDEX
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAYS
Softkey presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can
also be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AIRWY ON).
152
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AIRWY LO).
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AIRWY HI).
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AIRWAYS).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Display Selection
Low Altitude Airway Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
High Altitude Airway Range
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Airway’ group.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
6) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Airway Type
Symbol
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
APPENDICES
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
300
500
INDEX
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TRACK VECTOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30
sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Track Vector
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Wind Vector On/Off
Nav Range Ring On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
SVS Field of View On/Off
Selected Altitude Arc On/Off
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu - WIND VECTOR On/Off, NAV RANGE RING On/Off, FIELD OF VIEW On/Off,
SEL ALT ARC On/Off, TRACK VECTOR Setup, FUEL RNG (RSV) Setup
154
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WIND VECTOR
Wind Direction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Speed
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
EIS
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NAV RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range (radius)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
AFCS
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
INDEX
- System Setup Page.
156
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
Total Endurance Range
Time to Reserve Fuel
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Range to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
AFCS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
APPENDICES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is
only available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
AFCS
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
158
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actuallly climbing or descending.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Range to
Altitude Arc
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the CNS and Audio Panel section for details on autotuning.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the G1000. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the G1000’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
Identifier Entry Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Waypoint Location
APPENDICES
Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window
INDEX
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
160
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Identifier with
Duplicates
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Duplicate
Waypoints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Duplicate Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORTS
Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
AFCS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
EIS
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Airport/Runway
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-33 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, or Private
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
AFCS
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
Airport Directory
Information
Airport Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Softkeys
162
Figure 5-34 Airport Directory Page Example
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The airport directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey
until INFO-2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the
Airport Directory Page:
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published
Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions:
General
Airport Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
EIS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
APPENDICES
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
View a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate need to land is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a
list of the 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport
AFCS
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
NRST Softkey
INDEX
Figure 5-35 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
164
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
EIS
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
Airport Information
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-36 Airport Information Window on PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
AFCS
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to five frequencies,
and up to five approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
Nearest Airport
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
EIS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window Selection
Softkeys
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Figure 5-37 Nearest Airport Page
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
AFCS
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected. If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport)
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
166
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT).
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Nearest Airport Criteria
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
INDEX
Figure 5-38 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
EIS
Intersection Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-39 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
168
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Intersection Information
EIS
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intersection Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
Nearest
Intersection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-40 Nearest Intersections Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-41 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in conjunction
AFCS
with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker; when LMM is
used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
Selecting an NDB:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
170
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
EIS
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest NDB
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-42 Nearest NDB Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is
listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it’s displayed as VOR-DME.
EIS
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Selected VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
AFCS
Figure 5-43 VOR Information Page
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a VOR:
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
172
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT VOR WINDOW’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
VOR Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VOR Information
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
AFCS
VOR Frequency
Nearest VOR
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-44 Nearest VOR Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from an
existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has been
created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power down.
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Wpt Comment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
# User Wpts Used
GO BACK displayed if
User Wpt was created
on map page
Softkeys
Figure 5-45 User Waypoint Information Page
AFCS
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoint Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
174
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nearest User Wpt List
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Selected User
Waypoint
Figure 5-46 Nearest User Waypoint Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
AFCS
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
APPENDICES
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Figure 5-47 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
APPENDICES
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
INDEX
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
176
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’
APPENDICES
2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint
information page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
178
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
EIS
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restricted Area
Alert Area
AFCS
Class C Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
APPENDICES
Warning Area
Figure 5-48 Airspaces
INDEX
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
180
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
EIS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
Airspace Alerts Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
APPENDICES
INDEX
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-49 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu: See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
Airspace Alerts Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace 1
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Airspace 2
Associated Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Softkeys
Figure 5-50 Nearest Airspaces Page
AFCS
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspace Page.
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
APPENDICES
3) Select the desired airspace.
INDEX
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
182
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
EIS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Selected Point
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Desired Course
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-51 Direct-to Window - MFD
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
APPENDICES
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
INDEX
Activation Command
Figure 5-52 Direct-to Window - PFD
184
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-53 Waypoint Submenu
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST or RECENT waypoints
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page default to the
displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the
FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
INDEX
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
186
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Page Menu
- Cancel Direct-To
Navigation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
When navigating a direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
APPENDICES
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
INDEX
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Page Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
188
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight Plan Leg Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the G1000 consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The G1000 allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Symbol
EIS
Active non-heading Leg (TOPO On)
Active non-heading Leg (TOPO Off)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active heading Leg (TOPO On)
Active heading Leg (TOPO Off)
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
Non-heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Non-heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Anticipation Arc (TOPO On/TOPO Off)
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
APPENDICES
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This re-loads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
EIS
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active FPL Waypoint List
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Vertical Navigation Profile
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Vertical Deviation
- Time to Top of Descent
AFCS
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-56 Active Flight Plan Page
Active Flight Plan Comment
APPENDICES
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
INDEX
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
Figure 5-57 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
190
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan List
- Comment
EIS
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
Figure 5-58 Flight Plan Catalog Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the G1000 is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The system supports AFCS lateral guidance for all leg types (using NAV or FMS APPR mode). The
system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI, VM, or VR).
Creating an active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
APPENDICES
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
192
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
EIS
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Import Successful
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Import
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
INDEX
Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Export
194
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
EIS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys
Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Full Message
APPENDICES
Figure 5-62 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Figure 5-63 Duplicate Waypoints Window
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
APPENDICES
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
INDEX
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
196
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
EIS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The G1000 also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of
Selected Airway
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-64 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
Airway Entry Waypoint
EIS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airway Exit Points
Available
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-65 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
Inserted Airway Header
APPENDICES
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
INDEX
Figure 5-66 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
198
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
EIS
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the G1000 database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G1000 allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Plan Name
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan -
APPENDICES
Figure 5-67 Stored Flight Plan Page
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
EIS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMCI
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected
Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-68 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
200
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
EIS
Departure Transition
Points Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-69 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inserted Departure Header
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-70 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at
KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-71 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
202
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available
with DBRY1
EIS
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-72 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inserted Arrival Header
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-73 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
EIS
Destination Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available
at KCOS
BARO Minimum
Preview of
Selected
Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-74 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
INDEX
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
204
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Preview of
Selected
Approach
EIS
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Load Approach?
Figure 5-75 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-76 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the G1000 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
AFCS
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Information
APPENDICES
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
206
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
3) Press the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The G1000 allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
AFCS
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G1000 memory.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
AFCS
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The G1000 allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
G1000.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
INDEX
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
208
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
210
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
AFCS
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
APPENDICES
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and
Distance from Flight
Plan Waypoint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-78 Along Track Offset
AFCS
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
212
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PARALLEL TRACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
Selecting Parallel
Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-79 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
Activating parallel track:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-80 Parallel Track Window
Parallel Track Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- SLN-p
- HYS-p
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight
plan from the current
position on (will not affect
an approach)
AFCS
Parallel Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Original Track
APPENDICES
Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
214
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Subdued Prompt
(Unavailable)
EIS
Unavailable Status
Invalid
Geometry
Approach
Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-82 Parallel Track Unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
AFCS
Active Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-83 Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancelling parallel track:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a flight plan leg:
The G1000 allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selected Destination
Waypoint
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current
Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activate Leg Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
216
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
Switching between wide and narrow view:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
218
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
Active Flight Plan Wide View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-87 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflects the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and the “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Q3.FEPOT Airway
Collapsed View
Expanded View
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-88 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
EIS
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
220
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
Hold At
Wpt Menu
Selection
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
(TIME or DIST))
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length Mode Button
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-89 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘HOLD?’ instead of ‘ACTIVATE?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to wayoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
APPENDICES
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
INDEX
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
222
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the DIRECT TO Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further Clearance Time
INDEX
Activate Hold
Figure 5-90 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
223
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
Waypoint
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
(TIME or DIST))
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
APPENDICES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint Selection
INDEX
Figure 5-91 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
224
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
The G1000 system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-92 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The G1000 allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
After VNV Direct-to
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Prior to VNV Direct-to
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-93 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
INDEX
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
226
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G1000 system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displayed Text
Examples
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
AFCS
Large Light Blue Text
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Small Light Blue Text
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Small Light Blue
Subdued Text
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
APPENDICES
Figure 5-94 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
White Text
Cyan Text
Cyan Subdued Text
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note that these
altitudes are displayed as cyan text up to, but not including the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
AFCS
Altitudes that are not designated for use in vertical guidance can be “designated” using the ENT Key. The
altitude is now displayed as cyan text and is used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed altitudes may
change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude to a designated
altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
APPENDICES
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
228
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the G1000 allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
EIS
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle (6° down) or maximum vertical speed (-2000
fpm) to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the G1000 displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The G1000 also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
EIS
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
230
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually intitiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-95 Procedure Leg Identifiers
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
5) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
Available Procedure Actions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Departure Airport
Loaded Procedures
Departure Preview
Departure Choices
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-96 Departure Selection
232
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Departure
Loaded Departure
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-97 Departure Loading
Viewing available departures at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on
the map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box. The departure is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1 Softkey or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading a departure into the active flight plan from the Departure Information Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Select a different departure, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
EIS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Departure Information Page Menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure into the active flight plan.
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
234
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
Destination Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
APPENDICES
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-98 Arrival Selection
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-99 Arrival Loading
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the
map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the INFO-1 Softkey or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
236
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan from the Arrival Information Page:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Select a different arrival, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
EIS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The arrival is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Arrival Information Page Menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure into the active flight plan.
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
EIS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The G1000 SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V and LPV approach service
levels according to the published chart. The ‘+V’ designation adds advisory vertical guidance for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. The active approach
service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
238
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Example on HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima. Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/
(available only if VNAV minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
SBAS available) unavailable)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided
SBAS available) (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV
(available only if minima
SBAS available)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 5-9 Approach Types
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Available Procedure Actions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Destination Airport
Loaded Procedures
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
Figure 5-100 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected Approach
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-101 Approach Loading
240
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Departure
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Runway box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1 Softkey or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
EIS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
242
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet)
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
6,368 feet is reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure..
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Course to Altitude Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-102 Course to Altitude
APPENDICES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
on the MFD, or in the REFERENCES Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for
the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the
minimums. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation
to the MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
AFCS
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-103 Temperature Compensation
244
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ACTIVATE
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
CANCEL
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
EIS
Figure 5-104 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Compensated
Altitudes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Uncompensated
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-105 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘CANCEL COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-106 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
INDEX
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
246
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
APPENDICES
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required for trip.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by subtracting
the time of fuel endurance by the amount of time to go.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-107 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
248
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-108 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
EIS
Press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
1) Press the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
AFCS
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM PREDICTION Box
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-109 RAIM Prediction
250
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
EIS
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
AFCS
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-110 SBAS Display - Active
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The SBAS SELECTION ‘WAAS’ field is highlighted.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
APPENDICES
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
INDEX
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-111 SBAS Display - Disabled
252
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
G1000 provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
EIS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-112 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Figure 5-112 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-112 Assigned Heading of 240º
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-113.
Figure 5-113 Assigned Heading of 290º
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
254
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-114. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-114 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-115.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-115 Entering V4 Entry Point
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-116.
Figure 5-116 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-116, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-117.
Figure 5-117 List of Available Airways for TOP
INDEX
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-117.
256
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-118.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-118 List of Available Exits for V4
i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-118.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-119.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-119 Ready to Load V4
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
k) Press the ENT Key.
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-120.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-120 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-121. Note the TOP to
SLN leg is actually part of V4.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-121 Comfirm Active Leg
258
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-122, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-122 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-123.
Figure 5-123 Turn on to Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-124.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-124 Turn to Intercept V244
260
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) As seen in Figure 5-125, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-125 V244 Now Active Leg
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-126.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-126 HYS to LAA Leg Active
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-127.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
c) Press the Direct-to (
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-127 Direct To OPSHN
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-128.
Figure 5-128 Enter VNV Altitude
262
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-129.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-129 Enter VNV Offset Distance
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three miles
prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the G1000 gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-130, the magenta arrow indicating the
direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset
distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure
have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a
track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude, then
pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as cyan meaning it is used by the system to determine
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-130 Direct-to Active
264
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-131.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-131 Procedures Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-132.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-132 List of Available Approaches
INDEX
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-132.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-133.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-133 List of Available Transitions
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
Figure 5-134 Barometric Minimums Set
266
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-135.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-135 Loaded Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-136. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as cyan text, indicating these values are “designated”
for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
EIS
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-136.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the SBAS GPS altitude
source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-136 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
268
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -2.5 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -2.5 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-137.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-137 Adjusting the Descent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
15) As seen in Figure 5-138, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are now
displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-139.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-138 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
AFCS
Target Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
APPENDICES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
INDEX
Figure 5-139 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
270
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established which places the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-140.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-140 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-141.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-141 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-142. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-142 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
272
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-143. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-143 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-144). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
273
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INDEX
Figure 5-144 Approaching PYNON
274
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-145).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-145 Approach is Now Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-146.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-146 Manually Activate Approach
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-147 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
276
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-148) when the final approach course becomes active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-148 Descending to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-148.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-149.
Figure 5-149 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.
278
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-150.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-150 Missed Approach Active
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-151.
Figure 5-151 Establishing the Holding Pattern
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-152.
INDEX
Figure 5-152 Hold Established
280
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the G1000
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the G1000 detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the G1000
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G1000 in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the G1000 through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compounds the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DR Mode is indicated on the G1000 by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the ‘own
aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-153. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI slightly
above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-153. Also, the CDI deviation bar
is removed from the display. Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD.
Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
AFCS
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-153.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Also, while the G1000 is in DR Mode, the autopilot does not couple to GPS, and both TAWS and Terrain
Proximity are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints)
is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance &
Bearing
EIS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Wind Data
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current
Track
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Wind Data
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in yellow
AFCS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 5-153 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
INDEX
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
282
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the G1000 are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69A SiriusXM Weather (Optional)
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
EIS
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVS (Included with the Garmin SVT Option)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) (Optional)
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
• L-3 SKYWATCH® (SKY497) Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GDL 69/69A is a remote-mounted data link satellite receiver. Received graphical weather information and
associated text is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map.
The GDL 69A can also receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services. Both weather data and audio
entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities
at any altitude throughout North America.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Services from SiriusXM are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SERVICES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Before SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio can be used, the services must be activated. Services
are activated by providing coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69/69A. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (audio) and
SiriusXM Weather (data) services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to
activate the weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
• The XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
• The XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit
AFCS
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to provide weather data and/
or entertainment programming provided through the GDL 69/69A.
Activating the SiriusXM Weather service:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
3) Observe the list of Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather product; a
green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several minutes
for the weather products in the selected subscription package to become available.
INDEX
4) When the available weather products displayed match the weather products offered in the selected SiriusXM
Weather product subscription package, press the LOCK Softkey.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
6) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
284
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Radio
ID (for
SiriusXM
Satellite Radio)
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather data)
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select to Display
XM Information
page
EIS
Weather
Products
(Available
Products for
Service Class
Indicated in
Green)
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ACCESSING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
The principal map for viewing SiriusXM Weather information is the Weather Data Link (XM) Page in the Map
Page Group. This is the only G1000 map display capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM
Weather products.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Ages (U.S. and
Canada)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
NEXRAD Weather
Product Selected
for Display
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product, the system displays a weather product icon and product age.
The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data provider compiled the weather product.
The product age display does not indicate the age of the information contained within the weather product,
which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
EIS
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not broadcast within the Expiration Time intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to yellow. If data for a weather product is not available, the system displays ‘N/A’ next to the weather
product symbol instead of the product age.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times, and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not
contain updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated
or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control
the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
286
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
30
60
12
90
12
90
12
60
12
120
12
90
12
60
5
60
12
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
12
no product image
30
5
Temporary Flight Restrictions
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
(TAFs)
no product image
60
12
no product image
60
12
INDEX
12
APPENDICES
30
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
AFCS
30
SiriusXM Lightning
(XM LTNG)
Cell Movement
(CELL MOV)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
City Forecast
(CITY)
Surface Analysis
(SFC)
Freezing Levels
(FRZ LVL)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
County Warnings
(COUNTY)
Cyclone Warnings
(CYCLONE)
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7.5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
30
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
15
EIS
60
Echo Top
(ECHO TOP)
No Radar Coverage
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM Weather Product
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METARs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft (WIND)
AFCS
+
SiriusXM Lightning (XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
Weather Data Link
(XM) Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Navigation Map Page
NEXRAD
Weather Information
Page
SiriusXM Weather Products
PFD Inset Map
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
+
+
+
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
+*
+
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
AIREPs
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
INDEX
APPENDICES
* Winds aloft information appears on the Navigation Map Page inside the Profile View Window.
Table 6-2 SiriusXM Weather Product Display Maps
288
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure
6-3 shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). When a weather product is
selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.
CYCLONE SFC OFF
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
LTNG
CELL MOV
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP
ENGINE
BACK
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
LEGEND
BACK
EIS
OFF
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
AFCS
SFC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OFF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Weather Product Softkeys
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (XM) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Menu
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (XM) Page settings:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
5) Highlight the desired option to restore defaults (for all or for selection), and press the ENT Key.
Weather displayed on pages other than the Weather Data Link (XM) Page use settings based on those selected
for the Navigation Map Page.
290
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, maximum range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
When a SiriusXM Weather product is enabled for display on the PFD Inset Map, the weather product
information box (with the product icon and age) can be displayed inside the PFD Inset Map.
APPENDICES
Viewing the weather product information box on the PFD Inset Map:
1) On the PFD, press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey.
3) To remove the weather product information box, press the WX LGND Softkey again.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link (XM)
Page.
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page):
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends for enabled weather products.
EIS
4) To remove the XM WEATHER LEGENDS Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press
the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning the map pointer over a displayed
product on the map:
• Echo Tops
• METARs
• Cloud Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• PIREPs
• AIRMETs
• AIREPs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
AFCS
Additional
Information on
Weather Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flash Flood
Warning
Selected with
Map Pointer
INDEX
Figure 6-9 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
292
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, turbulence,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
or icing data is displayed on map pages.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD
network provides important information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of
the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded
to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link
(XM) Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected
for display.
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of no radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
Reflectivity
AFCS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
294
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
EIS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Unknown precipitation occurring below 52ºN is displayed as rain, regardless of the actual precipitation
type.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Block Area is 4 km2
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Weather Product - 30 NM Range
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
APPENDICES
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed regardless of actual propitiation
type.
EIS
No Coverage
Above 55ºN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation
Above 52ºN
Displays As Mixed
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Data - Canada
ECHO TOPS
AFCS
NOTE: Echo tops cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD or Cloud Tops are selected for display.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Echo Tops weather product (Figure 6-14) shows the location and elevation of the highest radar echo.
The highest radar echo does not indicate the actual top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest
altitude at which the NEXRAD system detected precipitation.
296
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Data
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ECHO TOP Softkey.
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No Radar Coverage
APPENDICES
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Legend
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas where
NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected are
indicated in gray shade of purple.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cloud Tops weather product (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery.
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Data
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the CLD TOP Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected
for display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
INDEX
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
298
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
NOTE: SiriusXM Lightning data cannot be displayed at the same time as optional WX-500 Stormscope
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
lightning is selected for display.
The SiriusXM Lightning weather product (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground
lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact
location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lightning
Strikes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-18 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey (LTNG Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page).
To display the SiriusXM Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-19), press the
LEGEND Softkey when SiriusXM Lightning is selected for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-19 Lightning Legend
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL MOVEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cell Movement weather product (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by the ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement
indicated with short, orange arrows.
EIS
Additional information
for selected Storm Cell
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Storm Cell selected
with Map Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Data
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD. On the Weather
Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement data can be displayed independently from NEXRAD.
AFCS
Displaying Cell Movement information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). For Cell Movement to
be displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the
Navigation Map Setup Menu (see “Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page”).
APPENDICES
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, (Figure 6-21), press the
LEGEND Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
300
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather conditions. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous
convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical
position.
AIRMET for IFR
conditions
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRMET for
icing conditions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SIGMET
AIRMET for
turbulence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
APPENDICES
190-00647-03 Rev. A
INDEX
Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
AFCS
Selected Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports typically within a 24hour period, but may span a longer period. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena,
and sky conditions using METAR codes.
APPENDICES
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information, when available, is displayed only in its original form.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
302
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
EIS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR Symbol
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
APPENDICES
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-27), press the LEGEND Softkey
when METARs are selected for display.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information to determine the METAR category.
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Navigation Database
service area.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
304
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Press the softkey corresponding to the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The
SFC Softkey label changes to reflect the forecast time selected.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), press the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend
FREEZING LEVELS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Freezing Level weather product shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at
which the first isotherm is found (Figure 6-30). When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for
that altitude has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears
when it becomes available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Weather Product
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-31), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data
is selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WINDS ALOFT
The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-32) shows the predicated wind speed and direction at the
surface and at selected altitudes. Winds Aloft altitudes can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments from the
surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
306
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 9,000 Feet
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-34). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
307
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft Product
Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-34 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on Profile View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-3.
Headwind
Symbol
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
AFCS
10 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
50 knots
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-3 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
308
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/Hiding Profile View (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft information inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on
the Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-35).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-37).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The County Warning weather product (Figure 6-38) provides specific public awareness and protection
weather warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on severe
thunderstorms, tornadoes, and flood conditions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional
Information on
Thunderstorm
Warning Selected
with Map Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Severe
Thunderstorm
Warning
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flood
Warning
Figure 6-38 County Warnings
AFCS
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.
APPENDICES
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-39), press the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-39 County Warnings Legend
310
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CYCLONE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-40) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical
storms, and depressions using the symbol shown below (Figure 6-41). Storm tracks include the predicted
date and time of arrival inside orange boxes.
EIS
Cyclone
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-40 Cyclone Data Selected for Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.
AFCS
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-41), press the LEGEND Softkey when the Cyclone weather
product is enabled.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-41 Cyclone Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ICING (CIP & SLD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Current Icing Product (CIP) data (Figure 6-42) shows a graphical view of the icing environment. Icing
severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft type). The
CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the analysis.
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data is selected for display.
EIS
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Areas of Icing
Potential
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SLD Threat
Area
Figure 6-42 Icing Data at 9,000 Feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-43), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is selected for
display.
Figure 6-43 Icing Potential Legend
312
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBULENCE
NOTE: Turbulence data cannot be displayed at the same time the NEXRAD weather product is selected for
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
display.
The Turbulence weather product (Figure 6-44) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between
21,000 and 45,000 feet. The Turbulence weather product is intended to supplement AIRMETs, SIGMETs,
and PIREPS.
EIS
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Light
Turbulence
Moderate
Turbulence
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-44 Turbulence Data at 21,000 Feet
APPENDICES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-45), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
INDEX
Figure 6-45 Turbulence Legend
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are airborne weather reports collected from pilots. When significant
weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
EIS
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIREP
Urgent PIREP
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PIREP
Figure 6-46 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not present in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
314
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Decoded Urgent
PIREP Text
EIS
Original Urgent
PIREP Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-47 Urgent PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-48), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are
selected for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-48 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
AFCS
TEMPORARY FLIGHT RESTRICTIONS (TFRS)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas
where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security,
law enforcement, natural disasters, airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time.
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Summary
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-49 TFR Information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying TFR Information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information at the top of the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
Figure 6-50 Full Text for Selected TFR
INDEX
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR information
is decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
316
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR information can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-51).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-52).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-53).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-51 Navigation Map Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIRIUSXM WEATHER ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM services
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
EIS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the System Status Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).
INDEX
Figure 6-54 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
318
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message
XM Information Page - Data Signal
Strength field
NONE
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CHECK ANTENNA
Message Location
XM Information Page - Data Signal
Strength field
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
of page
NO SIGNAL
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
WAITING FOR DATA...
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
EIS
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED
System is activating SiriusXM subscription(s).
SiriusXM Weather subscription confirmed.
Downloading weather data.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-4 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 WX-500 STORMSCOPE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
EIS
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Nearest Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Map - Stormscope Page is the principal page for viewing Stormscope data. Stormscope data can be displayed
on other map pages as an additional reference. To display Stormscope data on any map besides the Stormscope
Page, press the MAP Softkey (or the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map), then press the STRMSCP Softkey.
These pages can also display cell or strike data using the yellow lightning strike symbology shown in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Lightning Age and Symbols
AFCS
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-55), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-57).
320
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following options are available (Figure 6-56):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-55 Navigation Map
Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-56 Map Setup Menu
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-57). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes. When Stormscope is enabled on the Navigation Map, a STRMSCP Window appears. This window
indicates the selected Stormscope mode and lightning strike rate.
NOTE: When Stormscope lightning is enabled on the Navigation Map, the optional SiriusXM Lightning is
removed.
EIS
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Lightning
Strikes
APPENDICES
Stormscope
Enabled
Icon
INDEX
Figure 6-57 Navigation Map Page with
Stormscope Lightning Data
322
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn
(Figure 6-58). This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning®’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-58 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North up mode) on the Navigation
Map Page. However, in the track up mode at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning data
can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North up mode
shows all the data.
AFCS
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present. A
‘LTNG<25 nm’ annunciation appears in the upper right on the Navigation Map Page when this occurs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-59 Stormscope Lightning at Less than
25 nm Map Range Annunciation
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The maximum display range to show Stormscope information can also be set on the Navigation Map. Note
that Stormscope information above the selected maximum display range is decluttered.
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) To change the map range, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
Figure 6-60 Stormscope Page
324
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚ on the Stormscope Page:
EIS
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards.
It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse
Terrain Proximity with the optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B). TAWS-B is
more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning
annunciations or voice alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are
within a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the
same, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position.
GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea
level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
APPENDICES
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
INDEX
The symbols and colors in Figure 6-61 and Table 6-6 are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude
when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to
326
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the
altitude of the aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
EIS
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-61 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-6 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
The Map - Terrain Proximity Page is the principal map page for viewing Terrain Proximity information.
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
AFCS
• PFD Inset Map
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Terrain Proximity Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
APPENDICES
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-65).
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-62).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-63).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-64).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-62 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-63 Navigation Map Page Setup
Menu
328
Figure 6-64 Navigation Map Page Setup
Menu, Map Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
EIS
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-65 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
AFCS
The Terrain Proximity Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle data in relation to the aircraft’s current
altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal map page for viewing terrain information.
Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are
available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from one to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
3) To change the view,
a) Press the VIEW Softkey.
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
INDEX
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-66 Terrain Proximity Page
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
AFCS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Range Arc
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Figure 6-67 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)
330
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.4 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and altitude
on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide TAWS-B or Terrain-SVS terrain or obstacle
caution or warning annunciations or voice alerts systems, nor does it display potential impact points inside the
Profile View. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-68 and Table 6-7 are used to represent terrain and obstacles.
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
EIS
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
1000 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-68 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Profile View Terrain
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Table 6-7 Profile View Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Enabling/Disabling Profile View:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Enabling/Disabling Profile View Terrain on the Navigation Map (when Profile View is enabled):
INDEX
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the Profile View
is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to 1 nm, at which point
Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). When Navigation Map range
is adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles
from the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View; only an outline of the terrain
will be displayed in black in the Profile View window. Refer to the Terrain Proximity, Terrain-SVS, or TAWS-B
discussions for more information about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
Profile
View Path
Enabled
Navigation Map Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Legend
Terrain Enabled Icons
Altitude Scale
AFCS
Profile View Total
Distance
Distance Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-69 Navigation Map Page with Profile View Terrain and Topographic
Data Enabled
INDEX
APPENDICES
Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet AGL appear relative to aircraft altitude along the altitude scale.
The top of the obstacle symbol on the scale represents the obstacle’s height AGL. If the obstacle’s height AGL
is higher than can be represented by the obstacle symbol itself (e.g. for unusually tall obstacles), a vertical line
appears below the obstacle symbol in order to depict the top of the obstacle symbol at its height AGL, as shown
in Figure 6-70.
332
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-70 Profile View with Tall Obstacles
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Profile View is based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is unavailable) and shows the highest
known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from the present aircraft position to the end of the
profile range. The width of the Profile View is determined by the phase of flight, as annunciated on the HSI,
and is widest during enroute or oceanic phases (Table 6-8).
Flight Phase Total Profile View Width
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
0.6 nm
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach
Table 6-8 Profile View Width Scale
PROFILE PATH
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Profile Path displays the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile View. The path is shown as a
white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page and is only available when Profile View is enabled. White range
markers on both edges of the Profile Path rectangle correspond to the range markers along the distance scale
inside the Profile View display window whenever the profile range is at least four nm (or 7.5 km if configured
for metric units).
The Profile Path rectangle may be configured on or off, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-71).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-72.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-73).
EIS
• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum range at which Profile Path
is shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-71 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-73 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-72 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
334
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.5 TERRAIN-SVS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain-SVS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain-SVS is included with the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option. The TAWS-B option will
take precedence over Terrain-SVS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain-SVS is a terrain awareness system included with the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option.. The
optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) or standard Terrain-SVS is integrated within
SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain relevant to the projected
flight path. For detailed information regarding SVT, refer to the Additional Features section of this Pilot’s Guide.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse Terrain-SVS with TAWS-B. TAWS-B is more
sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays
are the same, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
Terrain-SVS does not provide the following:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)
• Descent to 500 Feet Voice Callout (VCO)
AFCS
Terrain-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
APPENDICES
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
The system’s GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above
mean sea level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL
altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to GSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVS
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVS DATA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-74 and Tables 6-9 and 6-10 are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
Figure 6-74 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVS
AFCS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
APPENDICES
Table 6-9 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
INDEX
Warning
Caution
Table 6-10 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
336
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Map - Terrain-SVS Page (Figures 6-78 and 6-79) is the principal map page for viewing Terrain-SVS
information. Terrain-SVS information can be displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD Inset Map
• Terrain-SVS Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
EIS
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Terrain-SVS is selected on maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page, an icon is shown to indicate that the
feature is enabled for display. A legend for Terrain-SVS terrain colors will accompany the icon on the Navigation
Map Page (Figure 6-81) and the Flight Plan Pages. The icon is always shown on the Terrain-SVS Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map settings chosen on the Navigation Map Page affect the map settings used on other maps and pages
(except the Terrain-SVS Page). The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the
range setting made for the Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map
is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also
adjusted proportionally.
AFCS
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-75).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-76).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-77).
APPENDICES
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
337
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-75 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-76 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-77 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVS PAGE
AFCS
The Terrain-SVS Page (Figures 6-78 and 6-79) is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact
point data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports,
VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of
the aircraft intersect, the system automatically reduces the map range, if necessary, to emphasize the closest
potential impact point on the Terrain-SVS Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading-up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from one to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain-SVS Page.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
338
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-78 Terrain-SVS Page
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Range Arc
AFCS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
APPENDICES
Figure 6-79 Terrain-SVS Page (ARC View)
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVS software algorithms.
Terrain-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an
alert is issued, visual annunciations appear with voice alerts. Table 6-11 shows Terrain-SVS alert types with
corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
EIS
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciation
appears to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the
Terrain-SVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up
alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVS Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alert Annunciation
Pop-up
Alert
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-80 Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciations
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-81 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
340
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVS Page)
Voice Alert
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
EIS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVS Alerts Summary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVS compares the projected flight path
as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The
system issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
EIS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
700
600
500
400
300
200
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
25
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-82 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends. When
Terrain-SVS alerts are inhibited, the annunciation ‘TER INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the MFD terrain
annunciation window.
AFCS
Figure 6-83 Terrain-SVS Alerting Disabled
(Terrain-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling Terrain-SVS alerting:
1) Select the Terrain-SVS Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
b) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain-SVS’ or ‘Enable Terrain-SVS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
While Terrain-SVS alerting is manually inhibited (or the system is unavailable or has failed), the system may
display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
INDEX
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix..
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
342
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, Terrain-SVS conducts a system test of its alerting capabilities. A voice alert occurs when
the test has completed.
Terrain-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain System
Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
No GPS position
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
AFCS
None
None
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVS operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
Aural Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
Terrain-SVS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
EIS
Terrain-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVS Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the system issues the “Terrain System Available” voice alert.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVS Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-12 Terrain-SVS System Status Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.6 TAWS-B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
EIS
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
situational awareness.
processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) is an optional software feature that provides audio
and visual warning messages to alert the flight crew of potential conflicts between the current flight path and
surrounding terrain and obstacles. The TAWS-B messages are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B requires the following to operate properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information from by government sources. Terrain information is based on
terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown
if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data, per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information
should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may be inaccurate.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea
level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to
determine TAWS-B alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local
altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude
provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
INDEX
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
344
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAYING TAWS-B DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-84 and Tables 6-13 and 6-14 are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-84 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-13 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
AFCS
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Warning
Caution
Table 6-14 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - TAWS-B Page (Figures 6-89 and 6-90) on the MFD is the principal map page for viewing TAWS-B
information. TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• TAWS-B Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
EIS
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon is shown to indicate that the feature
is enabled for display. A legend for TAWS-B terrain colors will accompany the icon on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-85) and the Flight Plan Pages. The icon is always shown on the TAWS-B Page.
Figure 6-85 Terrain Icon and Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
AFCS
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The map settings chosen on the Navigation Map Page affect the map settings used on other maps and pages
(except the TAWS-B Page). The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the
range setting made for the Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map
is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also
adjusted proportionally.
346
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-86).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-87).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-88).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
EIS
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-86 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-87 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
Figure 6-88 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to the
aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs)
can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the system
automatically reduces the map range, if necessary, to emphasize the closest potential impact point on the
TAWS-B Page.
EIS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from one to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
348
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-89 TAWS-B Page
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Range Arc
AFCS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Annunciation
Window
APPENDICES
Figure 6-90 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations are displayed and the system issues a voice alert. Table 6-15 shows TAWS-B alert
types with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
EIS
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation
appears to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the
TAWS-B Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up
alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alert Annunciation
Pop-up
Alert
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-91 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
Terrain Display Enabled
INDEX
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-92 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
350
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”*
*
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
*
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
*
AFCS
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
EIS
or
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
APPENDICES
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
INDEX
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-15 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. Figure 6-93 shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
EIS
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
3000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
Descent Rate (FPM)
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
500
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-93 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-B compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
APPENDICES
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-94. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
INDEX
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
352
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-94.
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
600
500
400
EIS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
300
200
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-94 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-95).
AFCS
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
600
500
400
300
APPENDICES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
INDEX
Figure 6-95 PDA Alerting Threshold
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The pilot can inhibit PDA and FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts. Discretion should be used when
inhibiting these alerts, as they should be enabled when appropriate. When PDA and FLTA alerts are manually
inhibited, the system displays the a ‘TAWS INH’ annunciation on the PFD and in the TAWS-B annunciation
window of the MFD (Figure 6-96).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
PFD
MFD
Figure 6-96 TAWS-B Alerting Inhibited Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
AFCS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While TAWS-B alerting is manually inhibited (or the system is unavailable or has failed), the system may
display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
APPENDICES
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix..
INDEX
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
354
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the voice alert “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft descends
to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within 5 nm of an airport, the
“Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft is more
than five nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain. There
are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany this voice alert.
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
EIS
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figures 6-97 and 6-98 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b for altitude loss and
climb rate respectively.
1000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
AFCS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
200
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-97 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1000
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
EIS
200
100
0
500
1000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-98 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM STATUS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a test of its alerting capabilities. The system test can also be manually
initiated. A voice alert occurs at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing is disabled when ground speed
exceeds 30 knots.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-99).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-99 TAWS-B Page Menu
INDEX
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ annunciation.
356
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alert Type
PFD/MFD* Alert TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation
System Test in progress
None
No GPS position
None
“TAWS System Test Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
None
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
None
None
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage
area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
TAWS TEST
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited
Aural Message
EIS
System Test pass
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the system displays
the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation, and issues the “TAWS Not Available” voice alert. When the GPS signal integrity
returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the system issues the “TAWS Available” voice
alert.
AFCS
† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-16 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.7 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
EIS
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
NOTE: TIS is disabled if a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every five seconds. The G1000 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below
to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed using the symbology shown in the table below.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
AFCS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-17 TIS Traffic Symbols
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which
traffic is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.
APPENDICES
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-100) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page
on which traffic can be displayed.
INDEX
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
358
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal page for viewing traffic information. Additional displays of traffic
information are available as map overlays while TIS is operating, and serve as additional reference to the Traffic
Map Page. Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
EIS
Traffic information is also displayed on the PFD when the optional synthetic vision system (Garmin SVT) is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a status icon is shown to indicate the feature
is enabled for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic Advisory
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Status
Banner
Annunciations
Traffic Display
Enabled Icon
Off Scale Traffic
Advisory
APPENDICES
Figure 6-100 TIS Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
INDEX
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-101).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-102).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-103).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-101 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-102 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
360
Figure 6-103 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up
unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by
the map range rings.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the G1000 begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.
EIS
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
AFCS
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
Traffic Advisory
Off Scale
400’ Below, Level
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
Press to
Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
INDEX
Figure 6-104 Traffic Map Page
APPENDICES
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Traffic Status
Banners
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Range
Marking
Ring
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
500’ Above,
Descending
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a visual annunciation appears
with a voice alert. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a
second TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases,
another voice alert is generated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AFCS
Figure 6-105 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
APPENDICES
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
INDEX
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
362
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM STATUS
EIS
The G1000 performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
a failure is detected in the data stream*
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DATA FAILED
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
The transponder has failed*
UNAVAILABLE
TIS is unavailable or out of range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-18 TIS Failure Annunciations
Traffic System
has Failed
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Data Not
Received from
Transponder
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-106 TIS Power-up Test Failure
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
TIS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TIS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-20 for additional failure annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-19 TIS Modes
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
364
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-20).
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC RMVD
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRFC COAST
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
EIS
AGE MM:SS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA OFF SCALE
Description
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-20 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.8 SKY497 TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
EIS
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: TIS is disabled when TAS is installed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Refer to the SKY497 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of this Traffic Advisory System (TAS).
TAS SYMBOLOGY
AFCS
The optional TAS is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS uses an on-board
interrogator-processor and an altitude reporting transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link. The system
displays traffic information using the symbols shown below.
TAS Symbol
Description
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
APPENDICES
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-21 TAS Symbol Description
INDEX
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
366
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
OPERATION
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed. The ability to switch from standby to operating
mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff.
EIS
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) On the Traffic Page, press the OPERATE Softkey or press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select
Operating Mode.
2) If using the FMS menu, press the ENT Key to place the SKY497 in the operating mode.
3) To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page, press the STANDBY Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System Self Test
1) Set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full display of traffic test pattern.
2) Press the STANDBY Softkey.
3) Press the TEST Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Self test takes approximately eight seconds to complete. When completed successfully, traffic symbols display
and a voice alert “Traffic Advisory System Test Passed” is heard. If the self test fails, the system reverts to
Standby Mode and a voice alert “Traffic Advisory System Test Failed” is heard.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PFD Inset Map
AFCS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal page for viewing traffic information. Additional displays of
traffic information are available as map overlays while TAS is operating, and serve as additional reference to
the Traffic Map Page. Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
APPENDICES
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the synthetic vision option (Garmin SVT) is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Press the ALT MODE Softkey to change the altitude volume.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Operating
Mode
Altitude
Mode
6) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Traffic Display
Range Ring
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
EIS
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“Non-Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending
Traffic
Advisory Off
Scale, 400’
Below, Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Proximity
Advisory, 900’
Above, Level
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-107 Traffic Map Page
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from two to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
AFCS
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
368
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic Advisory
Proximity Traffic
EIS
TA Off Scale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic Status
Icon
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“No Bearing”
Traffic Advisory
Banner Annunciation
Figure 6-108 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
Changing the altitude display mode:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) On the Traffic Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
APPENDICES
•
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
• BELOW
• NORMAL
• ABOVE
• UNREST (unrestricted)
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
EIS
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick from two to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-109).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-110).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-111).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
APPENDICES
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
INDEX
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
370
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-109 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-110 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-111 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Refer to the TAS documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS equipment.
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A “Traffic, Traffic” voice alert is generated.
AFCS
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-112 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TAS Self-test Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
OPERATING
EIS
TAS Operating
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TAS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed*
FAIL
* See Table 6-23 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-22 TAS Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-23 TAS Failure Annunciations
AFCS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
APPENDICES
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
INDEX
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-24 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
372
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The approved Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) always supersedes the information in this Pilot’s Guide.
NOTE: A failure of the primary (#1) Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) results in loss of the flight director. Any
IAU failure results in loss of the autopilot and manual electric trim.
• GSA 81 AFCS Servo (3)
• GDU 1044 Multi-Function Display (MFD)
• GSM 85 Servo Gearboxes (3)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
EIS
The digital Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is fully integrated within the G1000 System
avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram (Figure 1-1) to support this
system description. The Garmin AFCS functionality in Mooney M20M, M20R, M20TN aircraft is distributed
across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (2)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Garmin AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within the primary (#1) IAU. Flight director
commands are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Pitch/roll mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servo and provides servo
monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, AHRS attitude and
rate information, and airspeed.
AFCS
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric trim capability when the
autopilot is not engaged.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezel of the MFD:
AP Key
FD Key
Engages/disengages the autopilot
2
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. Pressing
again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If the autopilot
is engaged, the key is disabled.
3 NAV Key
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
4 ALT Key
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
5 VS Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
6 FLC Key
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
7 HDG Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
8 APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
9 VNV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
10 NOSE UP/NOSE Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change
modes
DN Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1
AFCS
1
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls
374
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following AFCS controls are located in the cockpit separately from the MFD:
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot Disconnect)
Disengages the autopilot and interrupts pitch trim operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This switch may be used to mute the aural autopilot disconnect alert.
The AP DISC Switch is located on the pilot’s control wheel.
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is
CWS Button
(Control Wheel Steering) engaged and synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current
aircraft pitch (if not in Glideslope Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold Mode)
EIS
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new
reference points, depending on the current pitch and roll modes. CWS
operation details are discussed in the flight director modes section.
GA Switch (Go Around)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The CWS Button is located on the pilot’s control wheel.
Disengages the autopilot and selects flight director Go Around Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed
approach when the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation
source is VOR/LOC and a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Switch is located on the instrument panel.
TRIM Switch
(Manual Electric Trim)
Used to command manual electric trim
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the
ARM contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward)
contacts. The TRIM ARM switch can be used to disengage the autopilot and to
acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural tone.
AFCS
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch
are operated simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for
more than three seconds, MET function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed
as the AFCS Status Annunciation on the PFD. The function remains disabled
until both sides of the switch are inactivated.
The TRIM Switch is located on the pilot’s control wheel.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director activated, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°/+20°) and roll (22°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director
in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display by
pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
NAV Key
Navigation**
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
Heading Select
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FD Key
AP Key
CWS Button
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Switch
AFCS
Modes Selected
ROL
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Takeoff (on ground)
TO
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
376
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS STATUS BOX
Lateral Modes
Armed
Active
Autopilot Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Autopilot
status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left
and vertical on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green.
Vertical Modes
Active Mode Reference
EIS
AFCS Status Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command
Bars
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
COMMAND BARS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed on the PFD as a single magenta cue. The
Command Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll
commands. The Command Bars do not override the aircraft symbol.
If the attitude information sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars are
removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or
bank exceeds 65˚.
EIS
Command Bars
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft Symbol
Figure 7-3 Command Bars
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll mode(s).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, WAAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
APPENDICES
Figure 7-4 Loss of VOR Signal
INDEX
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
378
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.3 VERTICAL MODES
Description
Pitch Hold
Flight Level Change
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Glidepath***
0.5°
nnnn fpm
-3000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
nnn kt
80 to 180 kt
1 kt
*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
VS Key
VS
FLC Key FLC
VNV
Key
VPTH
**
ALTV
APR
Key
GA
Switch
GP
GS
GA
7°
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Go Around
-15° to +20°
PIT
AFCS
Glideslope
(default)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Path Tracking
Reference
Change
Increment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
Reference
Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
Holds aircraft pitch attitude; may
be used to climb/descend to the
Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds current Altitude Reference
Holds aircraft vertical speed; may
be used to climb/descend to the
Selected Altitude
Holds aircraft airspeed while
aircraft is climbing/descending to
the Selected Altitude
Captures and tracks descent legs
of an active vertical profile
Captures the Vertical Navigation
(VNV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the WAAS
glidepath on approach
Captures and tracks the ILS
glideslope on approach
Disengages the autopilot and
commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level
Control Annunciation
EIS
Vertical Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes.
The NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under Pitch
Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change and acceptable ranges of values for
each of these references using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys are also listed in the table.
* ALTS is armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, or GA is active, and under VPTH when the Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of the VNV Target Altitude.
APPENDICES
** ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of the Selected Altitude.
***GP is available in installations with GIA 63W IAUs when WAAS is available.
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active pitch mode by the green annunciation ‘PIT’. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
EIS
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the
nose-up/down limit.
CHANGING THE PITCH REFERENCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
380
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pitch Hold
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-5 for example).
The ALT Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude Capture
Mode becomes active.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-6). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT” annunciation. The
Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active pitch mode field and flashes green
for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
AFCS
CHANGING THE SELECTED ALTITUDE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
Use of the ALT Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the new
Selected Altitude.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference, shown in the
AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode
active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode (see
Figure 7-6). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude
error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
EIS
CHANGING THE ALTITUDE REFERENCE
NOTE: Turning the ALT Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the flight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the
CWS Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
382
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current aircraft
vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed
Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on
the indicator.
EIS
CHANGING THE VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Button
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
Vertical
Speed
Reference
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). When
Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and
altitude.
EIS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHANGING THE AIRSPEED REFERENCE
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to a new airspeed, then releasing the CWS Button to
establish the new Airspeed Reference
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
384
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
Selected
Altitude
Airspeed
Reference
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or dead reckoning mode is active.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on
VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight control
modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon reaching
the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and cancels any
armed VNV modes.
VERTICAL PATH TRACKING MODE (VPTH)
NOTE: If another pitch mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
AFCS
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.
INDEX
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
Figure 7-10 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
386
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within 5 minutes of descent path interception by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
• Pressing the VNV Key
If acknowledgment is not received within 1 minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed, (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required)
VNV Target
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude Below
VNV Target
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
EIS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the Navigation Status Box
and the “Vertical Track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and vertical
speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta (Figure 7-11).
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
AFCS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-11 Vertical Path Capture
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile. An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as appropriate.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Required
Vertical Speed
Indication
(RVSI)
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-12 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the Altimeter’s barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
388
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
EIS
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.
Figure 7-13 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
AFCS
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VNV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed also (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-11).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT” annunciation. The
VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains displayed
above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once VNV
Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming
descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
AFCS
Altitude Reference (In
This Case, Equal To
VNV Altitude Target)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-14 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
APPENDICES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
INDEX
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
390
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP) (WAAS ONLY)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
Glidepath Mode is available only in installations with GIA 63W IAUs when WAAS is available. Glidepath
Mode is used to track the WAAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is annunciated in white
in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
EIS
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan.
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the APR Key.
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-15 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Vertical deviation is valid
• The CDI is at less than full scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
GPS Approach
Mode Active
Glidepath
Mode Active
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
Figure 7-16 Glidepath Mode
190-00647-03 Rev. A
INDEX
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Glidepath
Indicator
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
EIS
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
3) Press the APR Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
Figure 7-17 Glideslope Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
INDEX
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path
Figure 7-18 Glideslope Mode
392
Glideslope
Indicator
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GO AROUND MODE (GA)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pushing the GA Switch engages the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude, allowing the execution
of a missed approach or a go around. This mode is a coupled pitch and roll mode and is annunciated as ‘GA’
in both the active pitch and roll mode fields. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and arms Selected
Altitude Capture Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts to modify the
aircraft attitude (i.e., with the CWS Button or NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys) result in reversion to Pitch and Roll
Hold modes.
Go Around Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot Disconnect Annunciation
Flashes Yellow for 5 sec
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars Indicate Climb
AFCS
Figure 7-19 Go Around Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.4 LATERAL MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin AFCS offers the lateral modes listed in Table 7-3. Refer to the vertical modes section for information
regarding Go Around Mode.
Lateral Mode
Description
Control Annunciation
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the
HDG
Selected Heading
Key
EIS
Roll Hold
Heading Select
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation, GPS
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
Navigation Backcourse Capture/Track
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS,
VOR, LOC)
Captures and tracks a
localizer signal for backcourse
approaches
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
HDG
25º
GPS
25º
25º Capture
10º Track
25º Capture
10º Track
LOC
GPS
Approach, VOR Capture/Track
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
AFCS
25º
BC
Approach, GPS
Go Around
ROL
VOR
NAV
Key
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS,
VOR, LOC)
Disengages the autopilot and
commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level
APR
Key
VAPP
LOC
GA
Switch
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
GA
25º Capture
10º Track
25º
25º Capture
10º Track
25º Capture
10º Track
Wings Level
The Garmin AFCS limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
INDEX
APPENDICES
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
modes. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS
Button.
394
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
level.
When the flight director is activated, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is annunciated as
‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle conditions listed
in Table 7-4.
EIS
Figure 7-20 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 22°
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
CHANGING THE ROLL REFERENCE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains the
Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the upper
left of the HSI.
CHANGING THE SELECTED HEADING
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
EIS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the
aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading
upon release of the CWS Button.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes
of more than 340° at a time result in turn reversals.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Select
Mode Active
Selected
Heading
Selected
Heading
Bug
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-21 Heading Select Mode
396
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
EIS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where glideslope capture is not required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode.
Figure 7-22 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
AFCS
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed when the automatic navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key is pressed prior to the
automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
APPENDICES
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
• During a LOC/ILS approach the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode). Pressing the
CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Navigation Mode.
The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is
released.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Selected
Course
Command Bars Indicate Left
Turn to Track GPS Course and Climb
to Intercept Selected Altitude
Figure 7-23 Navigation Mode
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Backcourse
Mode Active
INDEX
LOC2 is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
Figure 7-24 Backcourse Navigation Mode
398
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected navigation
receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the CDI is greater
than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If
the CDI is less than one dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
EIS
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
AFCS
Figure 7-25 GPS Approach Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode). Pressing the
CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Approach Mode.
The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is
released.
400
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.5 AUTOPILOT OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot operates flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. Pitch and roll commands
are provided to the servos, based on the active flight director modes. The autopilot uses pitch and roll rates to
stabilize the aircraft attitude during upsets and flight director maneuvers. Flight director commands are rate- and
attitude-limited, combined with pitch and roll damper control, and sent to the pitch and roll servo motors.
EIS
Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the
pitch servo. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the pitch trim servo.
The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric trim (MET).
This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim wheel. Manual trim
commands are generated only when both halves of the TRIM Switch are operated simultaneously. Trim speeds
are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo gearboxes are equipped with slipclutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.
ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot and flight director (if not already engaged) are activated. Engagement
is indicated by a green ‘AP’ annunciation in the center of the AFCS Status Box. The flight director engages in
Pitch and Roll Hold modes when initially activated.
AFCS
Autopilot
Engaged
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-26 Autopilot Engaged
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS
maneuvers.
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to the flight
director modes section for specific CWS behavior in each mode.
EIS
Control Wheel Steering
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-27 CWS Annunciation
DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC Switch, GA Switch, TRIM ARM Switch, or the
AP Key on the MFD. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and
a two-second autopilot disconnect aural alert. After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert
may be cancelled by pushing the TRIM ARM or AP DISC Switch (AP DISC Switch also cancels the flashing
‘AP’ annunciation).
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
AFCS
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and by the autopilot
disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or TRIM ARM Switch.
Automatic disengagement occurs due to:
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-29 Automatic Autopilot Disengagement
402
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.6 EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
EIS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various Garmin AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles B.
Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the aircraft
climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
0
33
30
3
27
30
27
24
24
21
30
24
27
15
27
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
12
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
12
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
9
3
V4
18
V 244
9
6
0
33
15
6
KCOS
KMKC
30
6
3
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
33
0
33
0
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using GPS navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.
12
21
15
18
Figure 7-30 Flight Plan Overview
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
DEPARTURE
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Before takeoff, set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet using the ALT Knob.
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
EIS
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/
NOSE DN Keys or pushing the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new Vertical Speed
Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb using Vertical Speed Mode.
3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
AFCS
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
404
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
HD
GM
od
e
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
4
KMKC
VS
e
Mod
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
2
Figure 7-31 Departure
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
EIS
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to 255°. Note that at this point, the flight director is still in
Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly 290°.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
3
Hd
29 g
0o
30
AFCS
33
V4
6
27
3
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
24
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
255
9
o
VO
R
Mo
de
2
HD
G
12
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
15
21
18
APPENDICES
NA
V
ed
1
INDEX
Figure 7-32 Intercepting a VOR Radial
406
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
EIS
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
0
33
30
33
3
V4
6
3
o
075
e
30
d
AV Mo
6
27
GPS N
260
o
12
15
21
18
12
AFCS
24
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
2
24
27
076
1
d
AV Mo
VOR N
9
o
e
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
0
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
15
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
21
18
Figure 7-33 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DESCENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for the descent:
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
EIS
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the
Airspeed Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed
automatically.
2) Use the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys or push the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to adjust the
commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level
Change Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
AFCS
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
APPENDICES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
2
FLC
Mod
e
3
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
INDEX
ALT Mode
Figure 7-34 FLC Descent
408
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
EIS
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS is
armed rather than ALTV).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
• Press the VNV Key
• Turn the ALT Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
ALT Mode
TOD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
APPENDICES
VPT
HM
ode
3
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
INDEX
3 nm
OPSHN
Figure 7-35 VPTH Descent
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Using Flight Level Change Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
EIS
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off, reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
AFCS
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
410
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
VP
TH
M
od
e
ALT Mode
1
FL
C
Pla
nn
od
3
ed
De
sce
nt
ALT Mode
Pa
th
TOD
4
VP
TH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
M
e
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
Mo
de
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
5
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude
OPSHN
HABUK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3 nm
Figure 7-36 Non-path Descent
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
APPROACH
Flying an ILS approach:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
EIS
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the GA Switch to execute a missed approach.
3
LOC APR/
GS Mode
AFCS
KCOS
PETEY
G
HD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
e
od
M
1
INDEX
GPS NAV Mode
APPENDICES
PYNON
Figure 7-37 ILS Approach to KCOS
412
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
EIS
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the Decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the GA Switch to execute a missed approach.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
KCOS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
CEGIX
AFCS
2
FALUR
HABUK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PYNON
1
GPS NAV Mode
APPENDICES
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
Figure 7-38 LPV Approach to KCOS
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
EIS
1) Push the GA Switch at the Decision Height and apply go around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
Note that when the GA Switch is pushed, the missed approach is activated and the autopilot disconnects,
indicated by the ‘AP’ annunciation flashing yellow for 5 seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flashes 5 sec
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
a) Press the AP Key to re-engage the autopilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
3) Use the ALT Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
414
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS NAV Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MOGAL
3
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Mode
KCOS
1
AFCS
Figure 7-39 Go Around/Missed Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.7 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS STATUS ALERTS
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
AFCS Status Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-40 AFCS Status Annunciation
Alert Condition
Aileron Mistrim Right
Aileron Mistrim Left
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch Trim Failure
AFCS
(or stuck TRIM Switch)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Description
Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move TRIM switches separately to unstick
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
System Failure
Preflight Test
APPENDICES
Annunciation
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight
system tests as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never
to start (if servos fail their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to
the servos to remedy the situation.
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
INDEX
Table 7-5 AFCS Status Field Alerts
416
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in Altitude Hold, Glideslope or Glidepath Modes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director and pitch commands are limited for overspeed protection.
Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode
reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot airspeed.
EIS
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-41 Overspeed Annunciation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
417
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
418
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the G1000 include the following:
• Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
EIS
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• Airport Directory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• Scheduler
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features
on the PFD. SVT imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as
the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
AFCS
The AOPA and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such
as available services, hours of operation, and lodging options. Either the AOPA or AC-U-KWIK database may be
installed, but not both simultaneously.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver offers
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices
and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
maintenance phase checks or other events in the Messages Window on the PFD.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: SVT requires a terrain database that has a resolution of nine arc-seconds.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck.
SVT depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑78). The depicted imagery is
derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to
be disabled until the required data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-B) or standard Terrain-SVT is integrated within
SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the
projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVT or TAWS-B terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
420
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch ladder increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The
softkeys are labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to
the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
APPENDICES
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
SYN VIS
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
EIS
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
Figure 8-2 SVT Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVT:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
AFCS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
422
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVT FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Runway
Pathways
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS
PATHWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored rectangular
boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet
wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box width is
700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale
deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by
the selected altitude during climb, cruise, and when the active leg is the final approach course prior to intercepting
the glidepath/glideslope. During a descent (except while on the approach glidepath/glideslope), the pathway boxes
are displayed at the selected altitude, or the VNAV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan, or the
published altitude constraint, whichever is higher (Figure 8-4). Just prior to intercepting the glidepath/glideslope,
the pathway boxes are displayed on the glidepath/glideslope, or the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
APPENDICES
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that
correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI.
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the
Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Programmed
Altitudes
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
APPENDICES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
INDEX
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
424
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-5 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 8-6 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
426
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Zero Pitch
Line
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Color of
Pathways
match the
CDI color
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AFCS
Wind
Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
APPENDICES
ZERO PITCH LINE
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HORIZON HEADING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
EIS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in
the Inset map or MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the
SVT display. For more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORT SIGNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
AFCS
Traffic
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
428
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are outlined in white. Other runways will be
outlined in gray. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be
outlined with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft
gets closer to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other
Runway
on Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway
Selected for
Approach
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Runways
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERRAIN-SVT AND TAWS-B ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain
Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
430
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
EIS
Obstacle
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Obstacle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential
Impact
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-11 Obstacle Alert
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FIELD OF VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Displaying field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Field of
View
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
AFCS
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
432
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
434
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Taxiway
Identification
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport
Features
AFCS
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings and
airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection
names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless
the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back to the original
map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR Softkey
Removes Taxiway
Markings
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SAFETAXI
Option
INDEX
APPENDICES
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
436
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
SafeTaxi Database
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
Power-up Page Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
AFCS
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-18.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 14S1, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–14 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AFCS
SafeTaxi Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
APPENDICES
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑18 and 8-19). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑19). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
INDEX
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
438
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 8-19 illustrates possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX - System Status
Page. The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the
effective date, the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date
is the revision date for the next database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is before Effective Date
Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.3 CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the planview
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes (Figure 8-20) are not considered within the chart
boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol
is removed from the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 8-20 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Off-Scale
Areas
Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
APPENDICES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
INDEX
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
• Approaches
440
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
EIS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
SHW CHRT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
ALL
HEADER
PLAN
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
BACK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-21 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-22 Option Menus
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-23 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-24 Unable To Display Chart Banner
442
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-25 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑29). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Colorado Springs, CO (KCOS)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
Figure 8-26 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
444
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within
the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Romeo on the Charlotte, NC
(KCLT) airport.
EIS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using
the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information; the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates,
and Airline Parking Gate Location. The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.
When a European airport is displayed on the WPT- Airport Information Page, the INFO Box will also list
appropriate VFR charts, provided the Bottlang Chart subscription has been added to the ChartView database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aircraft
Current
Position
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-27, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-28).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-28 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
INDEX
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-29 Departure Information Page
446
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Chart Not
To Scale
EIS
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-30 Arrival Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
Figure 8-31 Approach Information Page
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WX Info
When
Available
WX Softkey
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-32 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-32. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
448
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-33 NOTAM Softkey Highlighted
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-34 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
INDEX
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-21).
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, ALL View
450
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Header View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
Chart Plan
View
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Plan View
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
Figure 8-39 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
452
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Pressed
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available
Information
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
with Info Window
Figure 8-41 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
INDEX
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
454
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
Figure 8-42 Page Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
AFCS
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
455
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-43 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑44).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
456
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-45 Arrival Information Page, Night View
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView Database
Figure 8-46 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
458
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 1403, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
03 – Indicates the third issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 17–FEB–14 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The DISABLES date 28–APR–14 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ChartView
Data
APPENDICES
Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-48. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-48 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Database Status
460
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area
depicted on some charts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Departure Procedures (DP)
EIS
Figure 8-49 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on
the published chart. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the
depicted geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic
position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is
relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale
Areas
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
INDEX
Figure 8-49 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart
and advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
EIS
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SHW CHRT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
WX
APR
GO BACK
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
AFCS
ALL
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-50 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
462
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-51 Option Menus
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-52 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-53 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
APPENDICES
Pan Chart
With the
Joystick
INDEX
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-54 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
464
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-55 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-55) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-56) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO‑1
or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
The Charlotte, NC airport has three additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate
Minimums, and Take-off Minimums.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Info Box
Selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-56 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
466
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In the example shown in Figure 8-56, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-57).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-57 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-58 Departure Information Page
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Figure 8-59 Arrival Information Page
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
INDEX
Figure 8-60 Approach Information Page
468
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G1000 softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Info Available
on This Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WX Info
When
Available
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
Figure 8-61 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
WX Softkey
Selected
APPENDICES
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-50).
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
470
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-63 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-64 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
472
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-65 Page Menus
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-66 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑67).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
474
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-67 Approach Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-68 Approach Information Page, Night View
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts are disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no
longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up
Page displays and the definition of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-69 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
INDEX
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-70. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
476
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
EIS
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is
shown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1402, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
02 – Indicates the second issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 10–FEB–14 is the first date that this database is current.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the last date that this database is current.
The DISABLES date 06–SEP–14 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
FliteCharts
Data
INDEX
Figure 8-70 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The other four possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date, in
yellow, indicates the current date preceeds the date the FliteCharts database becomes effective. The EXPIRES
date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that
this database cycle is no longer viewable. NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate the FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current Date is Before Effective Date
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-71 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Datbase Status
478
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-72.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
EIS
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AIRPORT INFORMATION Page. Initially, information for the airport closest
to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
3) If necessary, press the INFO softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-72 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport Directory Database
Figure 8-73 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.
AFCS
Database card contains no Airport Directory data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
480
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-74.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 14D1, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
1 – Indicates the first issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
EIS
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–14 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Directory
Data
AFCS
Figure 8-74 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in
blue when data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the
REGION field if Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.6 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for the
pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio® entertainment services at
any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on the GDL 69A Data Link
Receiver, not the GDL 69.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 8-70)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
482
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
activation data when the SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM
Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently pressed during flight. Refer to the
GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev K or later) for further information.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
EIS
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio through the email address listed on their website (www.siriusxm.com) or by
the customer service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions provided by XM Satellite
Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the next to last page in the AUX Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
Data
Radio ID
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Audio
Radio ID
AFCS
Weather
Products
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-70 XM Information Page
APPENDICES
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial Setup
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
If SiriusXM weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
EIS
3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active
Channel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Channel
List
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-71 XM Radio Page
484
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CATEGORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
EIS
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
AFCS
Figure 8-72 Categories List
PRESETS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
APPENDICES
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
INDEX
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
486
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
4) Press the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
EIS
Press MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Press SET to
Save Each
Preset Channel
Figure 8-73 Accessing and Selecting Preset SiriusXM Channels
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
VOLUME
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL Softkey, which
brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
AFCS
Figure 8-74 Volume Control
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Radio volume may also be adjusted at each passenger station.
Mute SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 SCHEDULER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-75 Scheduler (Utility Page)
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
INDEX
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
488
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message text.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
ALERTS Softkey label changes to ADVISORY. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Messages Window
and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to ALERTS when pressed. Pressing the
ALERTS Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-76 PFD Messages Window
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.8 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
EIS
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
REVERSIONARY MODE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
Figure 8-78 SVT Reversionary Mode
490
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-79 Unusual Attitude Display
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blue Band
AFCS
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-80 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
GDL 69/69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
EIS
• Ensure that nothing is plugged into the MUSIC IN jack because that would prevent SiriusXM radio from
being heard
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).
INDEX
Figure 8-81 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
492
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
OFF AIR
---
Message Location
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
EIS
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE Weather Datalink Page - center of page
within last 5 minutes
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
Weather Datalink Page - center of page SiriusXM subscription is not activated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 8-3 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
493
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Blank Page
494
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) supersedes information found in this document.
The G1000 Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
• Message Window: The Message Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages.
Pressing the ALERTS Softkey displays the Message Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time
removes the Message Window from the display. When the Message Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can
be used to scroll through the alert message list.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Softkey Annunciation: When a new message is issued, the ALERTS Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew of
a new message. It continues to flash until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. Active messages are displayed
in white text. Messages that have become inactive change to gray text. The ALERTS Softkey flashes if the state
of a displayed message changes or a new message is displayed. The inactive messages can be removed from the
Message Window by pressing the flashing ALERTS Softkey.
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by
a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the G1000 System Annunciations Section for more information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Audio Alerting System: The G1000 System issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met.
See the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested from the
AUX - System Status Page.
Testing the system annunciation tone:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Press to Test
Annunciation Tone
Figure A-1 System Status Page, Annunciation Tone Testing
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CAUTION ANNUNCIATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
APPENDIX A
VOICE ALERTS
Annunciation Text
LOW MAN PRES
Alerts Window Message
Manifold pressure is below 15 in. (M20TN only).
Audio Alert
Single Chime
EIS
The following voice alerts are announced by the system using a voice of male or female gender (see the
AUX - System Setup Page to change the audio alert voice). If the optional Terrain-SVS or the optional Terrain
Awareness and Warning System is installed, voice alerts are also generated (refer to the Terrain-SVS Alerts or
TAWS Alerts section).
Voice Alert
Description
Played when landing gear remain in the ‘Up’ position, and the pilot retards the throttle to
within 1/4” of idle.
“Minimums, minimums”
The aircraft has descended below the preset minimum descent altitude or decision
altitude.
“Vertical track”
The aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when vertical navigation is
enabled.
“Stall”
Played when a stall is detected.
“Traffic”
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued (TIS system)
“TIS Not Available”
The aircraft is outside the Traffic Information Service (TIS) coverage area.
“Traffic, Traffic”
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the optional SKY 497 TAS system.
See the Skywatch PG for additional details on voice alerts.
“Traffic Advisory System Test Passed” Played when the optional TAS system passes a pilot-initiated self test.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“Check Gear”
“Traffic Advisory System Test Failed”
Played when the optional TAS system fails a pilot-initiated self test.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
AUDIO ALERTS
Audio Alert
Description
Altitude Alert Chime
When aircraft altitude reaches the reference altitude threshold (+/- 1,000 ft of reference
altitude).
When aircraft altitude reaches or goes beyond the reference altitude deviation limit (+/- 200
ft of reference altitude).
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
APPENDICES
The G1000 System Messages convey messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the system.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data. The following section describes various system annunciations. Refer to the POH for additional
information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
NOTE: Upon power-up of the system, certain windows remain invalid as G1000 equipment begins to
INDEX
initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. Should any window continue
to remain flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
496
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
EIS
ALERTS Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALERTS Softkey Annunciation
Figure A-2 G1000 System Messages
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
AFCS
GRS 77 AHRS
Or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
Or
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
GIA 63/63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
APPENDICES
GDC 74A Air Data Computer
GTX 33/33D Transponder Or GIA 63/63W Integrated Avionics Units
Figure A-3 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
G1000 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
System Annunciation
Comment
System Annunciation
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
EIS
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Comment
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
This annunciation is only seen
when the autopilot is engaged.
The annunciation indicates an
AHRS monitor has detected
an abnormal flight parameter,
possibly caused by strong
turbulence. In this case, the
situation should correct itself
within a few seconds. If there
is an actual failure, a red “X”
soon appears over the Attitude
Indicator.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use.
Note that AHRS utilizes
GPS inputs during normal
operation. AHRS operation
may be degraded if GPS signals
are not present (see POH).
System is not receiving valid
heading input from GMU, but
is receiving GPS-derived track
information.
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from air data
computer.
498
Other Various Red X
Indications
System is not receiving valid
heading input from GMU and
is not receiving GPS-derived
track information.
CDI is not receiving valid data
from the corresponding GIA.
Does not apply when the CDI is
set to GPS.
Display system is not receiving
valid true airspeed information
from air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
Different versions of GDU
software are installed in the
PFD and MFD. This can also
indicate different versions
of the navigation database
installed in the PFD and MFD.
A cross-talk error between the
PFD and MFD will also cause
this annunciation.
A red ‘X’ through any other
display field (such as engine
instrumentation display)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or an
LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation as
shown previously in the G1000 System Annunciation section.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: This Section provides information regarding G1000 message advisories that may be displayed by
the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities
must be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The POH takes
precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD and/or MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFDs have different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
AFCS
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing
it several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
APPENDICES
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFDs with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFDs are not communicating with each other. The system should be
serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] Key
is stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD [key name] Key
is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
EIS
MFD & PFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
navigation database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
500
Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload
the navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain
card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, The
system should be serviced.
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, The system should be
serviced.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, The system
should be serviced.
The airport terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified
LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, The system should be
serviced.
The MFD and/or PFDs detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists,
The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
Comments
The MFD and/or PFDs detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists,
The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a fault in more than one database. If problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
EIS
The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions or regions installed.
Crossfill is off. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation The PFD and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or regions
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or regions installed. Check
mismatch.
the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AUXSYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions or regions installed.
mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
The PFD and MFD have different airport terrain database versions or regions installed.
database mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
NAV DB UPDATED – Active
System has updated the active navigation database from the standby navigation
navigation database updated.
database.
TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1 or MFD1]
One of the terrain, airport terrain, or obstacle databases required for TAWS in the PFD
Terrain awareness display unavailable. or MFD is missing or invalid.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GMA 1347 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDICES
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config error. The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
Config service req’d.
The system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions
service. Return unit for repair.
may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be
serviced when possible.
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
GIA 63W MESSAGE ADVISORIES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GFC software mismatch,
communication halted.
MANIFEST– COM1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST– COM2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST– NAV1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST– NAV2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
502
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be
serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should
be serviced.
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
Incorrect servo software software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
COM1 and/or COM2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
NAV1 and/or NAV2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
Comments
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter is operating at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The system should be serviced when possible.
EIS
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The COM1 and/or COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
AFCS
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘AUTO’.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver is
unavailable. The system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error.
Config service req’d.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change hdg reference to TRUE.
GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service. be available. The system should be serviced.
Return unit for repair.
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
FAILED PATH – A data path has
failed.
Comments
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The system
should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/W has failed.
GEA 71 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
AFCS
GTX 33 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
ADS-B is inoperative. Other transponder functions may be available. Transponder should
be serviced when possible. (GTX 33 with Extended Squitter only.)
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – XPDR1 unable to
transmit ADS-B messages.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
504
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
EIS
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The #1 AHRS and #2 AHRS magnetic model database versions do not match.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS magnetic
model database version mismatch.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
AFCS
Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
GDL 69A MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced
MANIFEST – GDL software mismatch, The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
communication halted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
GDC 74A MESSAGE ADVISORIES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
GDC1 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
GDC1 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
EIS
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked.
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
Or
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired. The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
Verify user modified procedures.
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
truncated.
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked flight plan.
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
than 10 minutes.
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
than 2 nm.
506
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
EIS
190-00647-03 Rev. A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
Comments
APR INACTV – Approach is not active. The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
frequency for approach.
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
approach.
the correct NAV receiver.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
Bad parallel track geometry.
bad geometry.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
past IAF.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
vertical waypoint.
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
angle error.
invalid.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
selected.
NON WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
The G1000 is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
failed.
should be serviced.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
Stormscope has failed. The system should be serviced.
failed.
FAILED PATH – A data path has
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/W has failed.
failed.
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
variance. Verify all course angles.
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
Message criteria entered by the user.
SVT DISABLED – Out of available
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
terrain region.
installed terrain database.
SVT DISABLED – Terrain DB
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arcresolution too low.
second or better) is not currently installed.
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Comments
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the top card slot of the PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The audio source for terrain awareness is offline. Check GIA1 or GIA 2.
Terrain audio alerts are not configured properly. The system should be serviced
Expect Further Clearance (EFC) time has expired for the User Defined Hold.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
CHECK CRS – Database course for
LOC1 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
[PFD1, or MFD1] CARD 1 REM –
Card 1 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1, or MFD1] CARD 2 REM –
Card 2 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1, or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR –
Card 1 is invalid.
[PFD1, or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR –
Card 2 is invalid.
TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness audio
source unavailable.
TERRAIN AUD CFG – Trn Awareness
audio config error. Service req’d.
HOLD EXPIRED – Holding EFC time
expired.
508
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS ALERTS
System Status Field
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure A-4 AFCS System Status Field
The following alert annunciations appear in the AFCS System Status field on the PFD.
Pitch Failure
System Failure
Elevator Mistrim Down
Aileron Mistrim Right
Aileron Mistrim Left
Roll axis control failure. AP is inoperative.
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MEPT switches separately to unstick
AP and MEPT are unavailable. FD may still be available.
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction. May indicate a
failure of the pitch trim servo or trim system.
Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
AFCS
Preflight Test
ROLL
PTRM
AFCS
↓ELE
↑ELE
AIL→
←AIL
PFT
PFT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Elevator Mistrim Up
PTCH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Trim Failure
(or stuck MEPT Switch)
Annunciation Description
Pitch axis control failure. AP is inoperative.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Roll Failure
EIS
Condition
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not press the AP DISC TRIM INTRPT switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests as
this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail their power-up tests). Power
must be cycled to the servos to remedy the situation.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
TERRAIN-SVT ALERTS
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVT Page
Aural Message
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
TERRAIN
WARNING TERRAIN
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
TERRAIN
WARNING TERRAIN
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
TERRAIN
WARNING OBSTACLE
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
TERRAIN
WARNING OBSTACLE
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
TERRAIN
CAUTION-TERRAIN
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
TERRAIN
CAUTION-TERRAIN
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
TERRAIN
CAUTION-OBSTACLE
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
TERRAIN
CAUTION-OBSTACLE
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
* Annunciation is shown on the Terrain-SVT Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVT SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
Terrain-SVS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
Aural Message
TER TEST
TERRAIN TEST
None
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
TER INH
None
None
No GPS position
TER N/A
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”†
TER N/A
None
“Terrain System Not Available”†
TER FAIL
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
None
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
Alert Type
System Test in progress
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
System Test pass
INDEX
APPENDICES
Excessively degraded GPS signal; or
Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail;
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid;
Invalid software configuration; or
System audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, TerrainSVT operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases
* Annunciation is shown on the Terrain-SVT Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
† “Terrain System Available” (in-flight only) when sufficient GPS signal received, or terrain database coverage re-entered.
510
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS ALERTS
Annunciations appear on the PFD and the MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD.
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
PULL UP
TERRAIN-PULL-UP
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
PULL UP
TERRAIN AHEAD-PULL-UP
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
PULL UP
OBSTACLE-PULL-UP
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
PULL UP
OBSTACLE AHEAD-PULL-UP
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull
Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
TERRAIN
CAUTION-TERRAIN
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
TERRAIN
TERRAIN AHEAD
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
TERRAIN
CAUTION-OBSTACLE
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
TERRAIN
OBSTACLE AHEAD
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)
TERRAIN
TOO LOW-TERRAIN
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
TERRAIN
SINK RATE
“Sink Rate”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
TERRAIN
DON’T SINK
“Don’t Sink”
Altitude Callout “500”
AFCS
PULL-UP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PULL UP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Voice Message
EIS
MFD Pop-Up Alert (except
TAWS-B Page)
Alert Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
* Annunciation is shown on the TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
TAWS SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Aural Message
TAWS TEST
TAWS TEST
None
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited
TAWS INH
None
None
No GPS position
TAWS N/A
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”†
TAWS N/A
None
“TAWS Not Available”†
TAWS FAIL
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
None
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
System Test in progress
EIS
System Test pass
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessively degraded GPS signal; or
Out of database coverage area
TAWS-B System Test Fail;
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid;
Invalid software configuration; or
System audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, TAWS-B
operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
* Annunciation is shown on the TAWS Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
† “TAWS Available” (in-flight only) when sufficient GPS signal received, or terrain database coverage re-entered.
512
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all loaded.’
AFCS
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight plan export failed.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
EIS
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These
waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in the
system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card; however, others
had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. One or
more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support. The
flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot find
in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited within
the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user
waypoints has exceeded system capacity; therefore, not all the user waypoints on the
SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are
locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the system before it can be
activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may not
have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No stored
flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
513
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
PILOT PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
Description
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid pilot profile filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Profile Import/Export Results
‘No pilot profile plan files found to
import.’
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
‘All available pilot profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Pilot profile import failed.’
‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Pilot profile export failed.’
‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’
514
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interuption during the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations,
SD cards are required for database storage as well as navigation and ChartView database updates. Not all SD cards
are compatible with the system. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft manufacturer.
EIS
CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Jeppesen Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card
other than a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being displayed in yellow.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
AFCS
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs) by virtue
of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Type 2 LOA Status.’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed
APPENDICES
in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
INDEX
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support to
coordinate the revised DQRs.
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Report An Aviation Data Error Report.’
JEPPESEN DATABASES
EIS
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a
14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will
no longer function.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Both these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen. The ChartView database should be copied to the
Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The navigation
database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.
com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or
Automatic Database Synchronization Features):
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the navigation database update into the top card slot of the
display (PFD or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:
Figure B-1 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to loading the active database.
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation database.
516
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) After the update completes, the PFD starts in normal mode.
5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode. Do not remove power while the display is
starting.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
7) Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other displays (PFD1 or MFD). Remove the SD card when finished.
8) Apply power to the system and press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
11) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show active navigation database information for each display
(MFD1 DB, PFD1 DB). Verify the correct active navigation database cycle information is shown for each display.
DUAL NAVIGATION DATABASE FEATURE
AFCS
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.
APPENDICES
The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database into the
active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes approximately
45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message, ‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
517
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading a standby navigation database:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
APPENDIX B
2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot of the PFD and the MFD.
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot
of the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed.
Figure B-3 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the YES Softkey. The navigation database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card, the display will appear as shown in Figure
B-4.
Figure B-4 Standby Navigation Database Update Complete
APPENDICES
6) As instructed on the display, press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure B-5.
INDEX
Figure B-5 Navigation Database Verification Prompt
518
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure B-6.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure B-6 Active Navigation Database Prompt
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not yet valid,
it should not be loaded as the active database. The display now starts in normal mode. Do not remove power
while the display is starting.
9) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) The new database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of each PFD. Progress can be monitored in
the SYNC STATUS field. When copying is finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed.
13) Turn system power OFF.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
14) Remove the SD card from the top card slot of the MFD.
15) Turn system power ON.
16) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
17) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
AFCS
18) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
19) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show standby navigation database information for each display
(MFD1 DB, PFD1 DB). Verify the correct standby navigation database cycle information is shown for each
display.
NOTE: The system compares the active databases on the PFD and the MFD, and displays a system alert
message ‘DB Mismatch’ if they are not identical. Similarly, if the standby databases on the PFD and the MFD
are not identical, the system will display a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby navigation databases.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
519
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
GARMIN DATABASES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap
• Airport terrain
• SafeTaxi
• Terrain
• Obstacle
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded to three
Supplemental Data Cards. Insert each Supplemental Data Card into the correct location shown in Figure B-7.
These cards must not be removed except to update the databases stored on each card.
PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD
Figure B-7 Correct Database Locations
Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit.
AFCS
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. The airport terrain database contains increased
resolution terrain data around airports. These databases are updated periodically and have no expiration date.
APPENDICES
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
INDEX
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S. or
worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days. The
AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000 airports with runways longer than 3,000
feet worldwide.
520
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
AUTOMATIC DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION FEATURE
EIS
The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single
SD database card to the SD cards on the PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized
throughout the system. After power-up, the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar
databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system that
does not already contain that database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Basemap, Safetaxi, Airport Terrain, Obstacle,
Airport Directory (AOPA or AC-U-KWIK), and Terrain. This feature applies only to databases that are stored
on the SD card that resides in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the active
navigation database which is stored internally in each display, or to the charts databases (FliteCharts and
ChartView) which are only required to be present on the MFD. The typical procedure would be to download
new databases to the MFD card, then synchronize the data to the PFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The 9-arc second terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method.
Therefore the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power
source while performing the database synchronization.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section
of the Database Window (Figure B-8). This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable
database, including the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being
copied. When the synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to
which the databases were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred
on the current power-up.
An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Sync Status Section
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure B-8 AUX-System Status Page, Database Window
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Display Database Softkey (Figure B-11) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon
first press of the Display Database Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black text on gray
background) and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll through
all databases in the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Softkey is pressed
repeatedly, the softkey will cycle through PFD1, PFD2, and MFD. Database status information in the Database
Window will reflect the database of the selected PFD or MFD. After a successful sync and restart, verify that
the proper databases are now in use on the AUX–System Status Page (Figure B-8).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If an error occurs during the synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the affected
display in the Sync Status section of the Database Window (Figure B-9). If a synchronization completes on
one display, but an error occurs on another, the error message will be displayed with the affected diaplay
listed after it. When an error message (Table B-1) is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the
synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card Full’ or
‘Err’ is shown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Database Synchronization Error Message
Figure B-9 Synchronization Error Message
AFCS
Error Message
Canceled
Card Full
Err
Timeout
Description
Database synchronization has been canceled by removing the bottom SD card in display being updated
SD card does not contain sufficient memory
Displayed for all other errors that may cause the synchronization process to be halted
System timed-out prior to the database transfer completing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table B-1
UPDATING GARMIN DATABASES
APPENDICES
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000, Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7)
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
INDEX
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-42, or -43) from the PFD and the MFD
522
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Updating Basemap, SafeTaxi, Airport Terrain, Obstacle, and Airport Directory Databases
These databases may be copied to one Supplemental Data Card, then automatically synchronized to other
card in the system:
1) With system power OFF, remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
EIS
2) Update the basemap, SafeTaxi, airport terrain, obstacle and/or airport directory databases on the MFD card.
3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-10). If a ‘Verifying’ message is seen, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-10 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
AFCS
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right-most softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window. Wait for all databases to complete synching, indicated by
‘Complete’ being displayed as seen in Figure B-9.
9) Remove and reapply power to the system.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
APPENDICES
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.
MFD1 DB
PFD1 DB
INDEX
MFD1 DB
Unselected
MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected
Figure B-11 Display Database Softkey
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
Updating Terrain, FliteCharts, and ChartView Databases
1) With system power OFF, remove the Supplemental Data Card from the bottom card slot of the MFD and PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Copy the updated terrain database to each of the Supplemental Data Cards. Copy the updated FliteCharts or
ChartView database to one Supplemental Data Card.
3) Insert the updated Supplemental Data Cards into the bottom card slot of the MFD and PFD. The Supplemental
Data Card containing the FliteCharts or ChartView database is inserted in the MFD.
EIS
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-10). A ‘Verifying’ message may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish
loading before proceeding to step 5.
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right-most softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
8) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9) Remove power from the system.
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database.
At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by each AHRS
(GRS1 and GRS2). If the system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page, as shown in Figure B-12. Note, in the following example, GRS1 is the first AHRS to
indicate an update is available. In actuality, this is dependent on which AHRS is the first to report status to the
system. GRS2 may be displayed before GRS1. The order is not important, only that both AHRS be updated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-12 GRS1 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
Loading the magnetic field variation database update:
INDEX
APPENDICES
1) With ‘OK’ highlighted, as seen in Figure B-12, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed
as shown in Figure B-13. When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.
Figure B-13 Uploading Database to GRS1
524
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN AVIATION GLOSSARY
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
APPENDICES
Degrees Celsius
Center Runway
Course to Altitude Leg
Calibrated
Calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Crew Alerting System
Course to DME Distance Leg
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix Leg
Channel
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
°C
C
CA
CAL
CALC
Calibrated
Airspeed
CAS
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CH, CHNL
AFCS
BFO
BKSP
BRG
Both Runways
Barometric Altitude
Barometer, Barometric
Battery
Backcourse
The compass direction from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
Beat Frequency Oscillator
Backspace
Bearing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
B
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Arrival
Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
Along Track
Automatic Sequence
Auxiliary
Average
Automated Weather Observing System
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
190-00647-03 Rev. A
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AVG
AWOS
EIS
AF
AFCS
AFM
AFMS
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
AIRREP
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
ALTS
ALTV
AMPS
ANNUNC
ANT
AOA
AOG
AOPA
AP
AP DISC
APPR, APR
APT
APTSIGNS
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
Accuracy
Active, Activate, Altitude Compensated Tilt
Air Data Computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Air Defense Identification Zone
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast
Arc to Fix Leg
Automatic Flight Control System
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Aeronautical Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
Air Reports
Alert
Altitude
Alternator
Selected Altitude Capture Mode
VNAV Altitude Capture Mode
Amperes
Annunciation
Antenna
Angle of Attack
Aircraft On Ground
Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association
Autopilot
Autopilot Disconnect
Approach
Airport, Aerodrome
Airport Signs
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ACC
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
ADIZ
ADS-B
525
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CHT
CHKLIST
CI
CLD
CLR
CM
CN
CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course to
Steer
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CPDLC
CPL
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack
Error
CRS
CRSR
CSC
CTA
CTR
CTRL
Cumulative,
CUM
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
526
Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist
Course to Intercept Leg
Cloud
Clear
Centimeter
Canada
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
Carbon Monoxide
Communication Radio
Configuration
Coolant
Copilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course
and proceed along the flight plan.
Controller Pilot Datalink Communications
Couple
Course to Radial Leg
Cockpit Reference Guide
Current
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
Course, Course to Steer
Cursor
Current Speed Control
Control Area
Center
Control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Recorder
Coverage
Control Wheel Steering
Cylinder
D ALT
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
DEG
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
DEST
DEV
DF
DFLT
DG
DGRD
DH
Dilution of
Precision
DIR
DIS
Distance
DME
DN
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DTK
E
ECU
Efficiency
EGNOS
Density Altitude
Database
Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Declutter
Decrease Fuel
Degree
De-icing
Departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
Destination
Deviation
Direct to Fix Leg
Default
Directional Gyro
Degrade
Decision Height
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry, where
higher numbers equal poorer geometry).
Direction
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
Distance Measuring Equipment
Down
Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
Departure
Dead Reckoning
Disabled
Desired Track
Empty, East
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Glideslope
Go-Around
Gallon(s)
Gearbox
Ground Clutter Suppression
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
Geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude Leg
Federal Aviation Administration
Final Approach Fix
Failure
Course From Fix to Distance Leg
G/S
GA
GAL, GL
GBOX
GCS
GDC
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
°F
FA
FAA
FAF
FAIL
FC
Federal Communication Commission
Forecast
Flight Director, Course From Fix to DME
Distance Leg
FDE
Fault Detection and Exclusion
FF, FFLOW
Fuel Flow
FIS-B
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
FISDL
Flight Information Service Data Link
FL
Flight Level
FLC
Flight Level Change
FM
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Leg
FMS
Flight Management System
FOB
Fuel On Board
FOD
Fuel Over Destination
FPA
Flight Path Angle
FPL
Flight Plan
FPM
Feet Per Minute, Flight Path Marker
FREQ
Frequency
FRMT
Format
FRZ
Freezing
FSS
Flight Service Station
FT
foot/feet
Fuel Flow
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on board
the aircraft.
FWD
Forward
EIS
Electromagnetic Interference
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight
time based on available fuel on board.
ENG
Engine
ENGD
Engaged
ENR
Enroute
Enroute Safe The recommended minimum altitude
Altitude
within ten miles left or right of the desired
course on an active flight plan or directto.
ENT
Enter
EPE
Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
Error
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
ESP
Electronic Stability and Protection
Estimated
A measure of horizontal GPS position
Position Error error derived by satellite geometry
conditions and other factors.
Estimated
The estimated time at which the aircraft
Time of Arrival should reach the destination waypoint,
based upon current speed and track.
Estimated
The estimated time it takes to reach
Time Enroute the destination waypoint from the
present position, based upon current
groundspeed.
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
EXPIRD
Expired
FCC
FCST
FD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System
Elevation, Elevator
Emergency
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EGT
EIS
ELEV
EMER, EMERG,
EMERGCY
EMI
END, ENDUR
Endurance
527
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMA
GMC
GMT
GMU
GND
GPH
GPN
GPS
GPWS
Grid MORA
Groundspeed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GSA
GSL
GTS
GTX
GWX
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HA
HDG
HDOP
Heading
HF
INDEX
APPENDICES
HFOM
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
Horizontal
Figure of
Merit
528
Garmin Audio Panel System
Garmin Mode Controller
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Ground
Gallons per Hour
Garmin Part Number
Global Positioning System
Ground Proximity Warning System
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude; One
degree latitude by one degree longitude
in size and clears the highest elevation
reference point in the grid by 1,000 feet
for all areas of the grid or 2,000 feet for
mountainous
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
See Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed, Glideslope
Garmin Servo Adapter
Geodetic Sea Level
Garmin Traffic System
Garmin Transponder
Garmin Weather Radar
Hold Terminating at Altitude Leg
Heading
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a magnetic
compass or a properly set directional gyro.
High Frequency, Hold Terminating at Fix
Leg
Horizontal Figure of Merit
Mercury
High
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination Leg
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.
hPa
HPL
HR
HRZN HDG
HSDB
HSI
HT
HUL
Hz
Hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
Hour
Horizon Heading
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz (cycles per second)
I
IAF
IAS
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
IMC
IN
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Speed
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
Identification
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial Gallon
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Inch
Inactive
Increase Fuel
Indicator, Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on the
aircraft panel.
Information
Inches of Mercury
Intersection(s)
Integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Infrared Data Association
International Standard Atmosphere
Interstage Turbine Temperature, InterTurbine Temperature
INFO
IN Hg
INT
INTEG
IrDA, IRDA
ISA
ITT
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
AFCS
North
Navigation
Navigation Aid
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-00647-03 Rev. A
N
NAV
NAVAID
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
M
Meter, Middle Marker
MMO (VMO)
Maximum Speed
Mach Number Mach number is the ratio of the true
airspeed to the speed of sound.
MAG
Magnetic
MSG
MSL
MT, M
mV
MVFR
MKR
MOA
MON
MOV
MORA
MPEL
MPM
MSA
MSAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Left, Left Runway
Latitude
Label
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Local
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining,
Reserve
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known
consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
LGND
Legend
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO
Low
LOC
Localizer
LOI
Loss of Integrity (GPS)
LON
Longitude
LPV
Localizer Performance with Vertical
Guidance
LRU
Line Replaceable Unit
LT
Left
LTNG
Lightning
LVL
Level
Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
Maximum
Maximum Speed (overspeed)
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
Manual Electric Pitch Trim
Manual Electric Trim
Aviation Routine Weather Report
Multi Function Display
Multi Function Window
Military Grid Reference System
Megahertz
Microphone
Minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
Marker Beacon
Military Operations Area
Monitor
Movement
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level
Meters per Minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
System
Message
Mean Sea Level
Meter
Millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
EIS
L
LAT
LBL
LB
LCD
LCL
LED
Left Over Fuel
On Board
MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
MEPT
MET
METAR
MFD
MFW
MGRS
MHz
MIC
MIN
Minimum Safe
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Key Stuck
Kilogram
Kilohertz
Kilometer
Knot
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
KEYSTK
KG
kHz
KM
KT
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NDB
NEXRAD
NM
NoPT
530
NOTAM
NRST
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Nautical Mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required (procedure
shall not be executed without ATC
clearance)
Notice To Airman
Nearest
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
Offset
Oxygen
P ALT
PA
PASS
PC
PFD
PI
PIREP
PIT, PTCH
POH
POHS
POS, POSN
PPH
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
PROP
PROX
PSI
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR
Pressure Altitude
Passenger Address, Proximity Advisory
Passenger(s)
Personal Computer
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept Leg
Pilot Report
Pitch
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
Position
Pounds per Hour
Parts per Million
Present Position
Pressure
Procedure(s), Procedure Turn
Propeller
Proximity
Pounds per Square Inch
Procedure Turn
Parallel Track
Push-to-Talk
Power
QTY
Quantity
R
RA
RAD
RA, RAD ALT
RAIM
RAM
RAT
RCVR
REF
REM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
RMI
RMT
RNAV
RNG
RNP
RNWY, RWY
ROL
ROM
RPM
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RX
Right, Right Runway
Resolution Advisory, Radio Altimeter
Radial
Radio Altimeter
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
Random Access Memory
Return Air Temperature
Receiver
Reference
Remaining (fuel remaining), Reminder
Required
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Reverse, Revision, Revise
Radio Frequency, Constant Radius Turn to
Fix Leg
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Remote
Area Navigation
Range
Required Navigation Performance
Runway
Roll
Read Only Memory
Revolutions Per Minute
Reset Fuel
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Right
Reversionary
Receive
S
SA
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SEC
SEL, SLCT
SENS
SFC
South
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
Second(s)
Select
Sense
Surface
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Velocity (airspeed)
Maximum landing gear extended speed
Maximum landing gear operating speed
Minimum Control Speed
AFCS
V, Vspeed
VLE
VLO
VMC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unavailable
United States
User
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-00647-03 Rev. A
UNAVAIL
US
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRUE
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed, Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance System
Track Angle
Error
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURB
TURN
TX
Telephone
Temperature
Terminal
Track Between Two Fixes Leg
Temporary Flight Restriction
Target
True Heading
Traffic Information Service
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
Top of Climb
Top of Descent
Take-Off, Go-Around
Topographic
Total
Direction of aircraft movement relative to
a ground position; also ‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired
track and the current track.
Track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Truncated
Total
Turbulence
Procedure Turn
Transmit
EIS
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
TGT
T HDG
TIS
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
TOC
TOD
TOGA, TO/GA
TOPO
TOT
Track
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET/AIRMET
Significant Meteorological Information
Simulator
Supercooled Large Droplet
Slip/Skid
Symbol
Space
Speed
Special Position Identification
Speaker
Squelch
Service
Stabilization
Stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
Statistics
Standby
Standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
Suspend
Synthetic Vision Technology
Software
Synchronize
Synthetic Terrain
Synthetic Vision
System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SIAP
SID
SIG/AIR
SIGMET
SIM
SLD
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPC
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
STAB
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SUSP
SVT, SYN VIS
SW
SYNC
SYN TERR
SYN VIS
SYS
531
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VMO (MMO)
VNE
VR
VX
VY
VYSE
V
V DEV
VA
VAC
VAPP
VAR
VD
VDC
VERT
Vertical Figure
of Merit
Vertical Speed
Required
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VFOM
VFR
VHF
VI
VLOC
VM
VOR
VORTAC
VPATH, VPTH
VPL
VPROF
VR
VS
VSI
VSR, VS REQ
VTF
VHF Omnidirectional Range
VHF Omnidirectional Range Station and
Tactical Air Navigation
Vertical Path
Vertical Protection Level
VNAV Profile, Vertical Profile
Heading Vector to Radial Leg
Vertical Speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
Vertical Speed Required
Vector to Final
W
WAAS
WARN
WATCH
WGS-84
WPT
WT
WW
WX
Watt(s), West
Wide Area Augmentation System
Warning
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
World Geodetic System - 1984
Waypoint(s)
Weight
World Wide
Weather
XFER, XFR
XM LTNG
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
Transfer
SiriusXM Lightning
Transponder
Cross-Talk
Cross-Track
YD
Yaw Damper
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOL
Maximum Speed
Never-Exceed Speed
Rotate Speed
Best Angle of Climb Speed
Best Rate of Climb Speed
Best Single-Engine Rate of Climb Speed
Volts
Vertical Deviation
Heading Vector to Altitude Leg
Volts Alternating Current
VOR Approach
Variation
Heading Vector to DME Distance Leg
Volts Direct Current
Vertical
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s vertical position.
The vertical speed necessary to descend/
climb from a current position and altitude
to a defined target position and altitude,
based upon current groundspeed.
Vertical Figure of Merit
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
Heading Vector to Intercept Leg
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Leg
Visual Meteorological Conditions
Vertical Navigation
Volume
532
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a particular aspect of G1000 operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is SBAS?
EIS
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the Middle East, and parts of northern
Africa. The Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan.
How does SBAS affect approach operations?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LNAV/VNAV, LP, and LPV RNAV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
AFCS
The implementation of RNAV LP and LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities.
RNAV LPV approaches are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach
combines localizer precision lateral guidance with vertical guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing
System (ILS). RNAV LPV approaches allow lower approach minimums.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
APPENDICES
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
INDEX
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
533
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
G1000 System monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A).
Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF,
the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure.
What is GSL altitude?
EIS
GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude is the height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), as calculated geometrically,
generally using a global positioning system (GPS) as the primary data source. The calculated result may or may
not include a barometric component, but the primary source is geometric.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Why might there be no approaches available for a flight plan?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the G1000 indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note the most recent active flight
plan is restored when the system is turned on, if the aircraft position is the same as the origin airport in the most
recent active flight plan. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When
storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from
the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the system automatically
updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an approach, departure, or
arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is deleted from the
flight plan.
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000?
APPENDICES
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000 system meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 or
TSO-C145c Class 3, and ETSO C145 Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an
expired database. See the approved AFM/POH as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more
information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
INDEX
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
534
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
the G1000 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
•
•
•
•
OBS
Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
•
•
•
Normal (OBS not activated)
Automatic sequencing of waypoints
Manual course change on HSI not possible
Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
Must be in this mode for final approach course
EIS
When OBS mode is active, the G1000 allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The G1000 suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G1000 from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Why does the G1000 not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
The G1000 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the “bisector” of the turn
being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs at an equal
angle from each leg.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
AFCS
The G1000 allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS
then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
When does turn anticipation begin?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The G1000 smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
APPENDICES
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
535
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
When does the CDI scale change?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Once a departure is activated, the G1000 Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3
nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the service level of the active approach (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, and LPV). When a
missed approach is activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on
CDI scaling.
EIS
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000 does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
AFCS
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The G1000 directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The G1000 provides navigation
along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
APPENDICES
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘SELECT APPROACH’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
INDEX
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
536
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP SYMBOLS
AIRPORT
LINE SYMBOLS
Symbol
Unknown Airport
Item
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Item
Symbol
Mode C Tower Area
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Towered, Serviced Airport
EIS
Warning Area Prohibited Area
Alert Area
Restricted Area
Caution Area Training Area
Danger Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Military Operations Area (MOA)
Restricted (Private) Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
State or Province Border
Heliport
International Border
NAVAIDS
Item
Symbol
Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
Railroad
Latitude/Longitude
BASEMAP
Item
VOR
Symbol
Interstate Highway
State Highway
VORTAC
US Highway
TACAN
National Highway
APPENDICES
VOR/ILS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VOR/DME
AFCS
NDB (non-directional radio beacon)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Road
Small City or Town
Medium City
INDEX
Large City
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
537
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX F
MISCELLANEOUS
TRAFFIC
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Item
Non-Threat Traffic
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Proximity Advisory
Default Map Pointer
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Elevation Pointer
Traffic Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Item
Measuring Pointer
Symbol
Lightning Strike (0-6 sec ago)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Symbol
Wind Vector
STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING STRIKES
Lightning Strike (6-20 sec ago)
Lightning Strike (20-60 sec ago)
Lightning Strike (60-120 sec ago)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Item
Symbol
Overzoom Indicator
Terrain Proximity or TAWS Enabled
Traffic Enabled
User Waypoint
AFCS
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Parallel Track Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)
APPENDICES
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
INDEX
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
538
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN AVOIDANCE COLORS AND SYMBOLS
Potential Impact Point
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Projected Flight Path
Unlighted Obstacle
EIS
Terrain Color
Terrain Location
Red (WARNING) Terrain above, or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow (CAUTION) Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure E-1 TAWS Color Chart
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure E-2 TAWS Potential Impact Points
Obstacle Symbol
Obstacle Location
Red
(WARNING)
Obstacle within 100 ft of
or above aircraft altitude
Yellow
(CAUTION)
Obstacle within 1000 ft of
aircraft altitude
Gray
Obstacle more than 1000
ft below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Obstacle
Color
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Height < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Obstacle Symbols and Colors
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
539
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX F
HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES
Feature
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS display enabled
EIS
Data Link Weather display enabled
Cloud Top display enabled
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Surface Analysis display enabled
Winds Aloft display enabled
Stormscope display enabled
Echo Top display enabled
Data Link Lightning display enabled
Cell Movement display enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Symbol
Freezing Levels display enabled
Traffic display enabled
SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
METARs display enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Feature
Cyclone Warnings display enabled
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD) (ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)
Air Report (AIREPs)
Turbulence (TURB)
Loss of hazard avoidance feature
(a white X is shown over the symbol
to indicate not available; e.g., traffic
symbol)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
City Forecast display enabled
County Warnings display enabled
540
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
INDEX
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
B
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 40
Barometric altimeter setting---------------------------42, 48
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------142
Bearing information-------------------------------------43, 54
Bearing pointer----------------------------------------------- 54
Bearing source----------------------------------------------- 54
Bottlang VFR Charts----------------------------------------445
Bus voltage--------------------------------------------------- 87
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
APPENDICES
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Approach-----------------------------------------------------534
Activating-------------------------------------------------242
ILS----------------------------------------------------------412
Loading--------------------------------------- 204, 239, 241
Missed-----------------------------------------------------414
Removing--------------------------------------------------242
Approach box-----------------------------------------------465
Approach channel----------------------------------- 204, 239
Approach Mode, AFCS------------------------ 399, 412, 413
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 241, 249
Arrival Alerts-------------------------------------------------- 34
Arrival procedure------189, 202, 235, 237, 262, 264, 273
Assist, engine leaning---------------------------------- 80–82
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)----- 4, 8,
11–12
Attitude Indicator----------------------------------------42, 46
Audio alerting system--------------------------------------495
Audio Alerts--------------------------------------------------496
Audio Panel------------------------------------------------ 2, 10
Audio panel controls
SPKR-------------------------------------------------------123
Audio panel fail-safe operation---------------------------130
Aural Alerts--------------------------------------------------496
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)------ 1, 373–418
Alerts-------------------------------------------------------509
Controls-------------------------------------------- 374–375
Example procedures------------------------------ 403–410
Status Annunciations------------------------------------416
Status Box-------------------------------------------------377
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------102
Autopilot----------------------------------------373, 401–402
Disconnect----------------------------------- 375, 393, 402
Auto-tuning--------------------------------------------------110
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------- 97
Auto-tuning, NAV-------------------------------------------106
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------136
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)--------------------------------------- 25
AUX - system status page-437, 439, 459, 460, 476, 477,
478, 481
Aviation Symbols------------------------------------- 147, 189
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------207
Active channel-----------------------------------------------485
Active database-------------------------------------- 516, 517
Active frequency--------------------------------------- 94, 103
ADF---------------------------------------------------------112
AC-U-KWIK------------------------------------- 419, 479, 520
ADF
ADF mode------------------------------------------ 112, 114
ANT mode-------------------------------------------------114
Volume-----------------------------------------------------112
ADF audio----------------------------------------------------104
ADF/BFO-----------------------------------------------------114
ADF/DME tuning--------------------------------------------115
ADF frequency tuning--------------------------------------113
ADF volume--------------------------------------------------114
AHRS----------------------------------------------------- 11, 505
Air Data Computer (ADC)------------------------------------ 3
Airport
Information-----------------------------------------------167
Airport Directory-------------------------419, 479, 480, 520
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------- 182, 183, 281
Airspeed Indicator---------------------------------------42, 44
Airspeed Reference-----------------------------------------384
Airways
Collapsed--------------------------------------------------220
Expanded--------------------------------------------------220
Alerting System-------------------------------------- 495, 496
Alerts
Audio voice------------------------------------------ 34, 496
Alerts Window------------------------------------------------ 65
Along Track Offset----------------------------------- 211, 212
ALT------------------------------------------------------------277
Altimeter--------------------------------------------------42, 47
Altitude
Constraints----------------------------------------- 227, 264
Altitude Alerting--------------------------------------------- 67
Altitude capture-------------------------------------- 381, 390
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)----------------------------------382
Altitude Reference----------------------------- 381, 382, 390
Ammeter------------------------------------------------------ 87
Annunciations
G1000 System--------------------------------------- 10, 496
Test tone---------------------------------------------------495
Annunciations, G1000 System
Test tone---------------------------------------------------- 35
Annunciation Window-------------------------------------- 43
ANT/BFO-----------------------------------------------------114
AOPA-------------------------------------------- 419, 479, 520
AOPA Airport Directory------------------------------ 480, 481
AP-------------------------------------------------------------509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A
I-1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
C
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------246
CAUTION-----------------------------------------------------496
CDI---------------------------- 238, 253, 264, 272, 279, 507
Chart Not Available---------------------------------- 442, 463
Chart options----------------------------------------- 450, 470
Chart setup box-------------------------------------- 455, 474
ChartView---------------------------------419, 440, 441, 459
ChartView database----------------------------------------459
ChartView plan view---------------------------------------451
ChartView profile View-------------------------------------452
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------220
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------101
COM frequency box-------------------------------------91, 94
Command Bars, flight director----------------------------378
Communication (COM) frequency box------------------- 42
COM tuning failure-----------------------------------------130
Controls
AFCS------------------------------------------------ 374–375
PFD/MFD------------------------------------------13–14, 23
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 15–18
Control Wheel Steering (CWS)--------------------- 375, 402
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------207
Course deviation indicator--------------------------------- 55
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT °F)--------------------- 74
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
D
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Database(s)---------------------------------------7, 8, 35, 515
Database synchronization---------------------------------521
Data entry------------------------------------------------ 22–23
Data Link Receiver--------------------------------------------- 4
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------492
Date and time------------------------------------------------ 32
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 455, 474
Day view----------------------------------455, 457, 474, 475
DB Mismatch------------------------------------------------519
Dead reckoning---------------------------------------------- 70
DEC FUEL softkey-------------------------------------------- 79
Declutter, display--------------------------------------------- 72
Delete Flight Plans------------------------------------------208
Deleting
An entire airway----------------------------------- 209, 210
An entire procedure------------------------------ 209, 210
An individual waypoint----------------------------------209
Flight Plan Items-----------------------------------------208
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------248
Departure
Procedure------------------------------200, 214, 232, 234
Select------------------------------------232, 235, 239, 242
Time--------------------------------------------------------246
Timer-------------------------------------------------------- 38
Departure procedure chart------------------------- 446, 467
I-2
Direct-to-- 160, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188, 225, 226, 262,
264, 279
Display backup-------------------------------------------10, 93
Display controls----------------------------------------- 13–20
DME
HOLD mode-----------------------------------------------115
NAV1 mode-----------------------------------------------115
NAV2 mode-----------------------------------------------115
Tuning mode--------------------------------------- 112, 115
DME audio---------------------------------------------------104
DME information-----------------------------------------54, 55
Dual navigation database---------------------------------517
E
Emergency frequency---------------------------------------130
Endurance, calculated (ENDUR)-----------------------77, 79
Engine Airframe Unit------------------------------------------ 3
Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 73–88
Engine Manifold Pressure (MAN IN HG)--- 74, 76, 84, 86
Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------116
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------128
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT)---------------------- 80–81
Export Flight Plan-------------------------------------------513
F
Fail-safe operation------------------------------------------130
FD-------------------------------------------------------------509
Field of View (SVS)------------------------------------------158
Flight director-----------------------------------373, 376–377
Pitch modes---------------------------------------- 379–385
Roll modes------------------------------------------------394
Flight ID------------------------------------------------------122
Flight instruments-------------------------------------------- 44
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC)------------------ 384, 408
Flight plan
Closest point to reference------------------------------220
Storing-----------------------------------------------------534
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)-------------------------------------- 26
Flight timer---------------------------------------------------- 38
FliteCharts-------------------------------------------- 419, 461
FliteCharts cycle---------------------------------------------477
FliteCharts expiration--------------------------------------477
FliteCharts functions---------------------------------------462
FPA----------------------------------------------------- 227, 269
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------180
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------101
Frequency transfer arrow----------------------------------- 95
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------533
Fuel
Calculations------------------------------------------------ 79
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------248
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
INDEX
N
National Weather Service (NWS)-------------------------310
NAV1 audio--------------------------------------------------104
NAV2 audio--------------------------------------------------104
NAV frequency box------------------------------------------ 91
Navigation
Database------------------------------------------- 227, 228
Map--------------------------------------------------------186
Navigation Mode, AFCS---------------- 397–398, 406–407
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------103
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box-------------------------- 42
Navigation Source-------------------------------------- 55–56
Navigation Status Box-------------------------------------- 42
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------103
Nearest
Airport---------------------164, 165, 166, 167, 180–183
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------167
Airports Page-------------------------------- 165, 166, 167
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-00647-03 Rev. A
Magnetic Field Variation Database-----------------------524
Manual Electric Trim (MET)------------------------- 373, 401
Map
Panning----------------------------------------------------138
Symbols----------------------------------------------------537
Map Pages (MAP)------------------------------------------- 24
Marker beacon----------------------------------------------111
Marker beacon annunciations----------------------------- 66
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 89
Measurement units, changing displayed----------------- 33
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 22
Message advisories--------------- 499, 500, 501, 505, 506
MET-----------------------------------------------------------509
Minimum descent altitude (MDA)---------------------43, 68
Minimums----------------------------------------------------496
Missed Approach----------- 189, 243, 250, 253, 279, 414
Mode S-------------------------------------------------- 19, 116
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------105
Multi Function Display (MFD)-------------------------------- 2
Controls----------------------------------------------- 13–14
Softkeys----------------------------------------------------- 20
AFCS
IDENT function----------------------------------------------122
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------105
ILS approach-------------------------------------------------412
Import Flight Plan-------------------------------------------513
Indicated Airspeed------------------------------------------- 44
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------246
Info box-------------------------------------------------------466
Inset Map----------------------------------------------------- 43
Intercom system (ICS)--------------------------------------128
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 168–169
Inverting a flight plan--------------------------------------207
IOI------------------------------------------341, 351, 510, 511
M
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
I
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------146
Line Replaceable Units (LRU)-----------------------------2–5
LNAV----------------------------------------------------------253
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------111
LPV----------------------------------------------------- 253, 279
LPV approach------------------------------------------------403
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 42
Heading bug-------------------------------------------------- 42
Heading Select Mode (HDG)----------------------- 396, 404
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------111
Horizontal situation indicator--------------------------42, 50
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------103
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------103
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------103
L
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
H
Jeppesen navigation database----------------------------516
EIS
GDL 69/69A-------------------------------------------------284
Geodetic Sea Level (GSL)--------------------- 326, 335, 344
GFC 700 AFCS--------------------------------------- 373–418
Glidepath-----------------------------------------------------277
Glidepath Indicator------------------------------------------ 50
Glidepath Mode (GP)-------------------------- 391, 399, 413
Glideslope----------------------------------------------------277
Glideslope Indicator----------------------------------------- 49
Glideslope Mode (GS)------------------------------- 392, 412
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 184–282
Go Around Mode (GA)----------------- 375, 393, 414–415
GPS Window-------------------------------------------------522
Groundspeed------------------------------------------------- 39
GSL----------------------------------------------- 326, 335, 344
GTX 33 Transponder----------------------------------------116
J
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
G
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Endurance-------------------------------------------------248
Flow--------------------------------------------------------- 77
Quantity---------------------------------------------------- 76
Remaining-------------------------------------------------248
Required---------------------------------------------------248
Statistics---------------------------------------------------248
Fuel calculations--------------------------------------------- 86
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH)--------------------------- 74, 84, 86
Fuel on Board-----------------------------------------------248
Fuel remaining (GAL REM)--------------------------------- 86
I-3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------167
VOR------------------------------------------------- 180–181
Nearest Airport(s)-------------------------------------------241
Nearest Pages (NRST)--------------------------------------- 25
NEXRAD------------------------------------------------------293
Night view--------------------------------455, 457, 474, 475
Non-path descent------------------------------389, 410–411
Normal display operation------------------------------------- 9
NOTAMs------------------------------------------------------448
Reversionary mode-----------------------------------------130
ROC----------------------------------------341, 351, 510, 511
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)--------------------------------------395
Roll modes, flight director-------------------------- 394–397
Roll Reference-----------------------------------------------395
RVSI---------------------------------------------------- 270, 271
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 95
O
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------ 419, 434, 437
SafeTaxi database-------------------------------------------438
SBAS-------------------------------- 250, 252, 253, 502, 533
Scheduler----------------------------------------419–420, 488
Secure Digital (SD) card---------------------------------7, 515
Selected Altitude------------------ 381, 383, 386, 390, 404
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)--- 381, 382, 383,
386
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------159
Selected Course----------------------------- 43, 52, 398, 400
Selected Heading--------------------------------- 43, 52, 396
Selecting a COM radio-------------------------------------- 94
Sequencing, automatic-------------------------------------535
Servos------------------------------------------------------4, 401
SiriusXM
Radio------------------------------------------------ 284, 482
Receiver troubleshooting------------------------ 318, 492
XM WX Satellite Weather
NEXRAD---------------------------------------------------293
SiriusXM channel list---------------------------------------484
SiriusXM radio volume-------------------------------------487
SiriusXM Satellite Radio----------------482, 484, 485, 486
SiriusXM service class--------------------------------------483
SiriusXM Weather
Icing--------------------------------------------------------312
Turbulence-------------------------------------------------313
Slip/Skid Indicator----------------------------------------42, 46
Softkeys------------------------------------------------------- 42
EIS----------------------------------------------------------- 76
MFD--------------------------------------------------------- 20
PFD----------------------------------------------------- 15–17
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------123
Splash screen, power-up-------------------------------------- 8
Split COM operation----------------------------------------127
Standby database-------------------------------------------517
Standby frequency-------------------------------- 94, 97, 103
ADF---------------------------------------------------------112
Standby frequency field------------------------------------- 94
Standby Navigation Database----------------------------519
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------123
Stormscope--------------------------------------------------320
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------130
Sunrise--------------------------------------------------------247
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
OBS mode----------------------------------------------------- 60
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 501, 502
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 39
Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)------------------------------------74, 76
Oil Temperature (OIL °F)------------------------------------ 74
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 534–535
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 246, 248
Outside air temperature--------------------------------42, 62
Overspeed protection, autopilot--------------------------417
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
P
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 23–26
Page menus--------------------------------------------------- 22
Parallel Track------------------------------------------ 213, 214
Passenger address------------------------------------------126
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages--------------------514
Pilot profiles--------------------------------------------- 28–29
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)--------------------------------------380
Pitch modes, flight director------------------------- 379–385
Pitch Reference----------------------------------------------380
Power-up splash screen--------------------------------------- 8
Power-up, system---------------------------------------------- 8
Primary Flight Display (PFD)---------------------------------- 2
Controls----------------------------------------------- 13–14
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 15–17
Procedure examples, AFCS------------------------- 403–415
Procedure Loading Pages (PROC)------------------------- 26
Q
Quick tuning 121.500 MHz-------------------------------- 96
R
INDEX
APPENDICES
RAIM---------------------------------------238, 250, 251, 252
Range---------------------------------------------------------156
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-- 2 5 0 ,
533
Required
Vertical Speed--------------------------------------------270
Vertical Speed Indicator---------------------------------270
Reversionary display operation------------------------------ 9
I-4
S
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
INDEX
T
Unable to display chart----------------------------- 442, 463
Updating Garmin databases------------------------------438
User-Defined Holding Pattern-----------------------------222
V
VDI----------------------------------------------------- 270, 271
Vertical deviation-------------------------------------------388
Vertical deviation guidance-------------------------------228
Vertical Deviation Indicator-------------------------------270
Vertical navigation------------------------------------------227
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------226
Vertical Navigation (VNV)
Flight control--------------------------------------- 386–390
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)--------386–387, 409
Vertical speed guidance-----------------------------------228
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)--------------------------42, 49
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)----------------------------------383
Vertical Speed Reference----------------------------------383
Vertical track-------------------------------------------------496
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------121
VNAV---------------------------------------------------------188
VNV---------------------------------------------------- 269, 507
VNV guidance
Disabling--------------------------------------------------225
Enabling---------------------------------------------------225
VNV I\ndications--------------------------------------------- 64
VNV Target Altitude--------------------------------- 386–389
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)-------------390
Voice Alerts, TIS---------------------------------------------- 66
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic------------------------------- 362, 371
VOL annunciation-------------------------------------------125
Voltmeter------------------------------------------------------ 87
Volume-------------------------------------------------------487
Volume level
ADF-------------------------------------------------- 112, 114
VOR
Nearest--------------------------------------------- 180–181
VOR selection------------------------------------------------103
VSI-------------------------------------------------------------271
VS TGT------------------------------------------------- 227, 269
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
190-00647-03 Rev. A
U
EIS
TA-------------------------------------------------------------496
Tachometer (RPM)----------------------------- 74, 77, 84, 86
TAF------------------------------------------------------------302
TAS----------------------------------------------------- 496, 505
TAWS---------------------------------------------------------510
TAWS-B
System Status Annunciations---------------------------512
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)-----------------------315
Terminal procedures charts------------------------- 442, 463
Terrain------------------------------------------- 501, 510, 511
Color indications-----------------------------------------539
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)-- 67, 344
Five-Hundred Aural Alert--------------------------------355
Terrain Proximity--------------------------------------------326
Terrain-SVS---------------------------------------------------335
Alerts-------------------------------------------------------510
System Status Annunciations---------------------------510
Timer----------------------------------------------------------506
Departure--------------------------------------------------- 38
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 38
Timer, PFD generic------------------------------------------- 36
TIS-------------------------------------------------------------358
TOD---------------------------------------------- 269, 270, 276
TOPO DATA------------------------------------- 143, 144, 153
Top of Descent--------------------------------------- 269, 270
TOPO SCALE-------------------------------------------------145
Track Indicator------------------------------------------------ 51
Traffic
Annunciation---------------------------------------------- 43
Traffic Advisory (TA)----------------------------------------496
Traffic Annunciation----------------------------------------- 66
Traffic Information Service (TIS)
Voice alerts------------------------------------------------- 66
Transponder----------------------------------------------------- 3
Transponder code entry------------------------------------120
Transponder data box-----------------------------------89, 91
Transponder ground mode--------------------------------117
Transponder softkeys---------------------------------------117
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------118
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Transponder Status Box------------------------------------- 42
Trim, Manual Electric-------------------------- 373, 375, 401
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 246, 247, 248
Trip statistics--------------------------------------39, 247, 248
True Airspeed-------------------------------------- 42, 44, 248
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------535
Turn Rate Indicator--------------------------------------42, 53
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Sunset--------------------------------------------------------247
SVS troubleshooting----------------------------------------490
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------537
Synthetic Vision (SVS)------------------------- 419, 420, 507
System annunciations---------------------------10, 495, 496
System Page (EIS)-------------------------------------------- 86
System power-up---------------------------------------------- 8
System Setup Page------------------------------------- 27–33
System Status Page------------------------------------------ 35
System time--------------------------------------------------- 42
I-5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
W
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WAAS-------------------------------------------- 253, 403, 533
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------535
Skipping---------------------------------------------------535
Waypoint Pages (WPT)-------------------------------------- 24
Waypoint Selection Submenu--- 185, 191, 192, 196, 251
Wind--------------------------------------------------- 154, 155
Winds Aloft--------------------------------------------------306
X
EIS
XM radio entertainment-----------------------------------128
XM Satellite Radio--------------------------------------------- 4
Z
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------136
I-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
190-00647-03 Rev. A
G1000 Integrated Avionic System
®
l0
20
7
5
D.C.
ELEC.
29.9
4
3
10
5
0
VERTICAL SPEED
100 FEET PER MINUTE
15
UP
5
10
NO PITCH
INFORMATION
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411 f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House,
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire
SO40 9LR U.K.
p:44 (0) 23 8052 4000
f:44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
www.garmin.com
240
190-00647-03
Revision A
10
11900
225
11800
210
11700
10
10
200
1
500
1
11600
2
360‘
190
N
33
29.86IN
3
GPS
ENR
W
E
12
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200 f:913.397.8282
15
10
2
6
R
12000
250
TAS 269KT
Mooney M20M/
M20R/M20TN
20
DOWN
TURN COORDINATOR
2 MIN.
In Hg
29.8
6
L
2
ALT
30
8
24
l0
260
Mooney M20M/M20R/M20TN
S
21
20
20
l0
®
l0
20
1
18000
15
9
FEET
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
100
PILOT’S GUIDE
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising